JP2021023478A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on an operation of a start lever 41 after a bet operation is carried out. The corresponding reel is then stopped by an operation of stop switches 42-44, and a stop symbol according to a lottery result is stopped to generate put-out of medals. When winning a transition to a CZ mode, etc., an omen mode is set, and further a continuous performance is set to be executed in the omen mode. In the case in which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the execution of the continuous performance, when the continuous performance is executed base on a satisfaction of a first momentum, the execution of continuous performance is continued, and when the executed continuous performance is performed based on a satisfaction of a second momentum, the continuous performance is cancelled or suspended.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
A plurality of variable display areas in which the pattern is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied.
A specific effect executing means for ensuring that the specific effect is executed by a predetermined effect means in each of the case where the first opportunity is established and the case where the second opportunity different from the first opportunity is established.
With
The specific effect is executed over a period in which the game in which the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas is performed a plurality of times. Is a thing
The specific effect executing means is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a continuation determination means for determining whether or not to continue the specific effect during the execution, and a continuation determination means.
When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect, the first means for continuing the specific effect being executed and the first means for continuing the specific effect.
When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to the fact that the specific effect is not continued, the second means for stopping or interrupting the specific effect being executed and the second means.
With
When the specific effect being executed is executed based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the continuation determination means determines that the specific effect is to be continued, and the specific effect being executed is the first. (2) When the execution is performed based on the establishment of the opportunity, it is characterized by providing a means for determining that the specific effect is not continued.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a precursor mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the push order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for updating the number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and the end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production table for this omen. It is a figure which shows an example of a scenario data table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a figure which shows an example of the production table for pseudo precursors. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous production standby. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of a continuous effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing during a bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of continuous production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of continuous production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table according to the second embodiment, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of a continuous effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a preliminary effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of continuous production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing a bonus medium effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of a continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of continuous production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing in bonus which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a scenario data table. (A) is a flowchart showing the continuous effect execution process, (b) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of full stop, and (c) is a flowchart showing the continuous effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing in bonus which concerns on 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the continuous effect setting process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of full stop. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the ending effect execution process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing during a bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of an ending effect. In the seventh embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the number of games remaining until reaching the upper limit increase number of advantageous sections, and the number of games remaining until reaching the upper limit game number of advantageous sections. .. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing during a bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of an ending effect.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by hitting a nail against so-called island equipment at the time of installation in the game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving the stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the visible symbols. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops at the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops at the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and each symbol that stops at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped on the activated line, that is, the valid line in a predetermined combination, As a result of winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals as a game medium is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started, and these three or two medals are bet. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is set as an effective line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as an effective line. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game in which three medals are bet and started is a three-bet game, a game in which two medals are bet and started is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination prize corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the line where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the small winning combination is different from the above first small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the third small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination winning It is also understandable that different small role prizes have been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is won. If the fourth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbols corresponding to the fourth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbols are aligned and stopped on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination to third small winning combination winning It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is won. If the fifth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines in which the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from the above has been established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is won. If the sixth small winning combination is successful, 13 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a mound shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination It is also possible to understand that a small role prize different from that is established.

Left reel 32L "bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, right reel 32R "white 7" symbol, "white shell" If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be won. If the 7th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the “watermelon” symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth small winning combination is won. If the 8th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbols corresponding to the eighth small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and due to the difference in the line where the "watermelon" symbols are aligned, the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are mainly so-called missing roles in which a prize is established when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. Designs and medium reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, all of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are stopped with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

By the way, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination to 32nd small winning combination, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st re-game prize to 12th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be performed without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 10, prize-winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. When the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned on the upward-sloping line L5 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (b). As described above, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are stopped in order from the left on the upward-sloping line L5. When the second re-game winning is established, the transition to the gaming state does not occur, but the transition to the notification mode advantageous to the player occurs and the first AT state is started.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Akakai" symbol or the "youth" symbol, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. If you stop at the top, you will win a prize. When the symbol corresponding to the third re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the "white 7" symbol is aligned on the lower line L3 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (d). As such, the "Red 7" symbol is aligned on the downward-sloping line L4 and stops. When the third re-game winning is established, the transition to the gaming state does not occur, but the transition to the notification mode advantageous to the player occurs and the second AT state is started.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The sixth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12D, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

In the 7th replay, the left reel 32L "bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "ark shell" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the middle The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "Akakai" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. And, the prize is established when stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the symbols corresponding to the eighth re-game winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle stage replay tempai is stopped.

In the 10th replay, the left reel 32L "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game prize or the 12th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and stop the operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 10th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 12th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize. In the eleventh re-game, a prize is established when the tenth re-game and the twelfth re-game cannot be won, that is, when a omission may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the game state is performed.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out the medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent medals exceeding a predetermined amount from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, an induction plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored at a height higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 operates mechanically in conjunction with each other, and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of games is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, 3 virtual medals of 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the insertion is performed, the specified number of medals is set as two, and the specific number is set as two, two virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. Is input. Further, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of medals is set as 3 or 2 and the specific number is set as 3, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of cards is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number of cards is set to 2, 2 on condition that there is a credit. One virtual medal is inserted.

A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals.

Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operation surface operated by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operability than the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by inserting a set specific number of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided, which has a section indicator for changing the winning rate of the small winning combination and indicating an advantageous section which is a section in which the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, a model name of the game machine is described, and a lower display unit 69 constituting a predetermined display screen is provided. There is. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by the hall manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is a main control device so that it can be seen from the front of the game machine by opening the front door 12, and cannot be seen from the front of the game machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45, and medals paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volt, for example. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. It is connected via the output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 contains a memory for temporarily storing various types of data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of a winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main base that controls and manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the number. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command described later to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68 to perform the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As the game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a two-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process is performed. If an error has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, the affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "3", and the bet number is "2" or "3" in the non-bonus state. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in the game state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side in step S206. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied and notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64 And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211 and the medal payout process of step S212 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the flag for the gaming state set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state Select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus status flags is set in the status information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and it is used for the normal gaming state. Select a lottery table. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select a lottery table for normal game states (FIG. 21).

Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, the processing related to the setting of the winning probability will be supplementarily described.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, every time the start lever 41 is operated, "setting 1" → "setting 2" → Update the setting value so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed on, for example, the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is set as the setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is completed. To do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, the process of selecting the lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set in the subsequent step S304. In such a determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV, 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to the new determination value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see step S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset as one of the conditions that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB and the second BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the first BB and the second BB is set. If is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

A lottery table in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 / 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 / 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 / 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5) The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). The probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwich bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as the push order bell) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless, it is about 18.4 / 1. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 to 1). It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the first BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, before the 1st BB is won, about 1.50 medals can be expected to decrease per game (net increase minus about 1.50), excluding the increase in the 1st BB state. In the carry-over state after winning the 1st BB, a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the 1st BB state (net increase number minus about 2.10).

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal game state, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is determined by playing the game in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the case. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11-22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any role including the second BB is 0. Then, in the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the two-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 2-bet game, before the 2nd BB is won, about 0.24 medals can be expected to decrease per game (net increase minus about 0.24), excluding the increase of the 2nd BB, and the 2nd BB. In the carry-over state after winning, a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected excluding the increase in the second BB state (net increase number minus about 0.64).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winned when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winned when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 sets the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB winning is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the small winning combination is given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning is established, and the priority is set. .. If the re-game and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the re-game prize is given priority.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1st BB winning, the 7th small role and the 7th. When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8 small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the second re-game, the third re-game, and the fourth re-game prize is set, priority is given so that each re-game prize is established with priority over the second BB prize. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize of any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the process for updating the number of games is executed in step S314. In the game number update process, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, the CZ mode, and the AT mode is updated. The process for updating the number of games will be described in detail later.

In the following step S315, the section display first process is executed, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. To do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. Do. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by 5 symbols or more, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. The 18th small role symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Akakai" symbol and a "Shirakai" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is displayed on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop.

In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbols having a small number of sliding frames on the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 reels), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, but the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the medium reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbols and the "youth" symbols is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. is there. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper stage, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper stage, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the case where the winning combination may be established, there is also the possibility that the 20th small winning combination may be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Can not be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the player has won the middle forward push bell 1 or the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped to win the 18th small winning combination. And even if the stop mode is such that there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for the winning.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination prize.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol, which are the third small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol stops in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. To do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small wins, 3rd small wins, 4th small wins, 5th small wins, or 6th small wins are established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the operation is performed. Depending on the operation timing, the small winning combination will be established, or none of the small winning combination will be established and will be missed. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the first small role prize, the second small role prize, the third small role prize, the fourth small role prize, the fifth small role prize , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game prize to the twelfth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes has been established, the re-game setting process for setting the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current game mode is the re-game mode, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current game state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is present depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB prizes has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB prize has been established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, a process of inputting "46" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, when "46" is input to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out.

In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501.

In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the display control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 and the speaker 64 and the like so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of bets in the above game, and the number of bets that can start the rotation of each reel 32L to 32R by operating the start lever 41 (in other words, the game can be started). It corresponds to the number of bets that can be made). That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started. In this case, it is possible to play the game in either the 2-bet game or the 3-bet game.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "46" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game, the first The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed.

The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, the specified number of games is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

In the present embodiment, the BB counter (upper limit payout number) is set to the same value when the first BB prize is established and when the second BB prize is established, but these may be different values. For example, the value of the BB counter set when the first BB prize is established may be larger than that when the second BB prize is established, or vice versa.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. In the present embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables are provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. Normally, the probability of winning Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1 / 9.02, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1/78. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1/13. In this case, a decrease of about 0.96 medals per game is expected (net increase number minus about 0.96). That is, in the first BB state or the second BB state, the total difference number for the period from the start to the end of each BB state (the total number of medals paid out in the BB state minus the total number of medals inserted in the BB state). ) Is a negative value, and the number of medals held is reduced.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/9.03, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that a prize is more likely to occur than in the normal game state.

In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal game state, the probability is about 1/9.64. In the 2nd BB state, the prize is won with a probability of about 1/9.03, and even in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win the prize than the normal game state. It is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, since the lottery table that can reduce the medals in each game is adopted, the increase in the number of medals held even if the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are digested It cannot be expected, and conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will decrease by digesting the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, as a result of the lottery processing by the above-mentioned BB state lottery table and each reel control, it is determined whether or not any of the small winning combination prizes has been established in this game. If the prize is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516.

If it is determined in step S517 that the value is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, the BB end command corresponding to the BB state that ends this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, the first BB end command is output and set when the first BB state is terminated, and the second BB end command is output and set when the second BB state is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for ending the first BB and the effect for ending the second BB are performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, in the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state, it is possible to play the game in either the 2-bet game or the 3-bet game. However, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and the game is played in the 2-bet game. Will be done. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 and the 2nd credit insertion switch 57. In order to play the betting game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

In the initial state in which the RAM 106 is initialized (cleared), the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set, and the normal gaming state (non-internal state) in which none of the BBs is won. It has become. In this case, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and the game can be played in either the 2-bet game or the 3-bet game. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in the 3-bet game, the first BB can be won, but the second BB is not won. On the other hand, in the 2-bet game, on the contrary, although the second BB can be won, the first BB is not won. Therefore, in a situation where the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a non-internal state (a state in which 2 is input to the MAX bet counter) and a game is played in a 2-bet game, the second BB may be won. Become.

If the first BB or the second BB is won and the winning game is not successful, the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over (internal state). Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and the game can be played in either the 2-bet game or the 3-bet game. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the game is started by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the game is a 3-bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the first BB is won, the first BB prize can be established in the 3-bet game, while the first BB prize cannot be established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. Further, in the internal state in which the second BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the second BB winning cannot be established in the 3-bet game, while the second BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game. Will be done. That is, if the first BB is won in the 3-bet game, the first BB prize can be established if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, but if the first BB is won and then the 2-bet game is switched to, the first BB prize is won. Cannot be established. In addition, if the second BB is won in the 2-bet game, the second BB prize can be established if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, but if the second BB is won and then the 3-bet game is switched to, the second BB prize is won. Cannot be established. Then, the first BB and the second BB will not be won in duplicate, and in a situation where the first BB has been carried over, the first BB will not be won again, and the second BB will not be won in duplicate. In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB will not be won again, and the first BB will not be won twice. That is, if the game is played in the 2-bet game when the 1st BB is won, the game in the internal state where the 1st BB is won is continued endlessly, and when the 2nd BB is won, the game is played in the 3-bet game. Then, the game in the internal state carrying over the second BB winning will continue endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB prize is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB prize is established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, 3 in the situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over. If the 2nd BB prize is not established even if the result is not won in any of the roles in the betting game, and the result is lost in the 2-bet game in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the second BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the first BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over is displayed. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to use a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win a prize in another role at the time of the loss.

Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order (FIG. 25) from the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

Then, in the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, the game is played in a 2-bet game, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, the internal state is set, and the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated switches to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB prize cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB winning, and generally, the 2nd BB winning is carried over inside. The game in the state will be continued.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB winning flag is stored in the normal area in the various flag storage areas 106d, whereas the second BB winning flag is stored in the storage area in the various flag storage areas 106d. It is configured to be. The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags of other roles are stored. Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 is started while the various flags stored in the normal area are stored, and the first BB is won. Even if the power is turned on / off with the flag set, the slot machine 10 is started with the first BB winning flag set. However, when the winning probability setting process is activated when the slot machine 10 is started up (when the setting is changed), the normal area initialization process (clear process) is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in these normal areas.

On the other hand, the storage area is an area in which only the second BB winning flag is stored. Similar to the above-mentioned normal area, the flag stored in the storage area is not cleared when the power is turned on / off. Further, in the storage area, even if the winning probability setting process is activated when the slot machine 10 is started up, the storage area is not initialized (it is excluded from the initialization process). ). Therefore, even if the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is not cleared and is retained (saved). That is, when the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the first BB winning in which the first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and the operation is started as a non-internal state. , If the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the 2nd BB winning in which the 2nd BB winning flag is stored, the 2nd BB winning flag is not cleared and the operation is started in the internal state of the 2nd BB winning. The flag. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game in the internal state in which the second BB winning is carried over, not only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off but also when the setting is changed.

Then, in order to play the game in the internal state that carries over the second BB winning, basically, the game may be played until the second BB is won in the 2-bet game at the time of factory shipment of the slot machine 10. The second BB winning will be stored and retained until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clearing process is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably carry out the game in a state in which the second BB winning is carried over.

Hereinafter, assuming a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The lottery result handling process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a shift lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step S601, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed. More specifically, it is either the first BB state or the second BB state, or it is a non-internal state (normal gaming state) before the first BB or the second BB is won, or the internal state after the first BB or the second BB is won. Know if it is (carried over). In the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 3 is set as the specified bet number, and in the non-internal state before the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB and the internal state after the winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the specified bet number is set. 2 and 3 are set.

In the following step S602, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specified number (specified specified number) specified in the state grasped in step S601. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 3, and in this case, since the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3, the first step is S601. When it is determined that the state is the 1BB state or the second BB state, a positive determination is always made in step S602. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, three of the specified numbers 2 and 3 are set as the specified specified number, and the first BB state and the second BB state are set. When the number of bets is 3 in a state other than the above, an affirmative determination is made in step S602. In this case, the process for the display mode (process for the instruction function) after step S603 is performed. On the other hand, when the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the internal state is played in a two-bet game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S603 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and facilitate the normal game in which the second BB is carried over.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set as to whether or not the push order notification or the like occurs. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is an advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the game this time is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S604, and then the lottery result handling process ends.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game.

As shown in FIG. 30, as an opportunity for the lottery to shift to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and in step S703, the latest updated value of the counter is acquired. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantage section transition lottery is won with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not a loss result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, a process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S706. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or the transition has been completed. If none of the flags are set in step S605 and the transition to the AT mode has not yet been confirmed, the AT lottery process is executed in step S606. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S605, the AT addition process is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the AT lottery process, first, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S801. In the following step S802, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the CZ mode, is set (stored) at the start of the CZ mode, and is cleared at the end of the CZ mode. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ (chance zone) mode are provided as a state before winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode, which is an advantageous section, and the CZ mode is changed to the AT mode rather than the normal mode. It is set as a mode that makes it easy to win the transition lottery.

If it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is not stored, that is, in the normal mode, in step S803, the normal AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the normal AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the AT mode (winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is stored, that is, in the case of CZ mode, in step S804, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode is displayed from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. get. Also in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to AT mode is set according to the lottery result of each game.

In the present embodiment, in both the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ mode AT mode transition lottery table, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, the normal lip C, and the chance eye A serve as triggers for the AT mode transition lottery. , Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, Common Bell, Push Order Bell, Watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode and the CZ mode as the 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the AT mode transition lottery. However, in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the AT mode transition rate when the chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, and watermelon are won is the normal AT mode. It is higher than in the case of the transition lottery table, and the transition rate to AT mode is given preferential treatment.

The trigger of the AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won, and the 3 bets that carry over the second BB. The configuration may be such that only a part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode and the CZ mode as a game serve as a trigger.

After the execution of step S803 or step S804, the process proceeds to step S805, and the AT mode lottery process is executed. In the AT mode lottery process, a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is acquired, and the acquired random number, the lottery result grasped in step S801, and the AT mode transition lottery table acquired in step S803 or step S804 are used for AT. A lottery will be held to win or lose the mode. In the following step S806, it is determined whether or not the shift to the AT mode is won in the AT mode lottery process of step S805. If it is won, the process for winning the AT mode in steps S807 to S810 is executed, and if it is not won, the process for not winning the AT mode in steps S811 to S822 is executed.

Here, the AT mode is a mode in which the push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is generated when the push order bell is won, and a large number of medals can be expected to increase. When the mode shifts to the AT mode and the push order notification is generated, it becomes possible to establish the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when each push order bell is won. In the present embodiment, the net increase in the number of cards per game in the AT mode is plus about 8.04. In the AT mode, the initial number of games is set to 50, and by winning the additional lottery, the remaining number of games is added. In addition, the probability of winning the additional lottery is set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the AT mode ends.

When it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S807, that is, whether or not the CZ mode is in effect. To judge. If it is not in the CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S808, and the precursor mode setting process is executed. The precursor mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that the game has been won in addition to the number of games in the CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode is likely to occur, and the CZ mode or the like is won after each game in the precursor mode. Winning notification of what you have done is done. That is, when the number of precursor games is set and the mode shifts to the precursor mode, notification that the number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode has been added is waited until the set number of games is exhausted. It is supposed to be done. In addition, although details will be described later, the transition to CZ mode or AT mode, and the implementation of adding the number of games in AT mode are not performed immediately after winning the transition lottery in CZ mode, but the end of the precursor mode is terminated. Wait and be done. That is, the transition to the CZ mode and the like are also waited by the precursor mode. In that sense, the period from the transition to the precursor mode to the end can be said to be the waiting period in which the winning notification, the transition to the CZ mode, and the like are awaited.

In the precursor mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, first, in step S901, the precursor game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the precursor game number table according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, 5 to 32 games are set as the selectable precursor game number (the number of continuous games in the precursor mode), and the current game mode (normally). The selection probability of each number of games is set to be different depending on the mode (mode or AT mode).

Specifically, if you win the CZ mode transition lottery during the normal mode, there is a 10% chance that 5 games will be selected, a 30% chance that 6-10 games will be selected, and a 60% chance that 11 games will be selected. ~ 20 games are set to be selected. If the AT mode transition lottery is won during the normal mode, there is a 10% chance that 6 to 10 games will be selected, a 30% chance that 11 to 20 games will be selected, and a 60% chance that 21 to 21 games will be selected. 32 games are set to be selected. Further, if the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is won during the AT mode, 5 games are set to be selected with a 100% probability. It should be noted that each of these precursor games is only an example, and the length and selection probability of the precursor games can be arbitrarily set.

After acquiring the precursor game number table in step S901, the lottery process for the precursor game number is executed in step S902. In the lottery process for the number of precursor modes, the number of precursor games related to the present precursor mode is drawn based on the acquired precursor game number table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the following step S903, a process of setting (inputting) the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The precursor counter is a counter for grasping the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, and is subtracted by 1 for each game.

In step S904, the precursor mode flags are set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The precursor mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the precursor mode is in progress, is set at the start of the precursor mode, and is cleared at the end of the precursor mode. After the execution of step S904, the precursor start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S905, and then the precursor mode setting process ends. The precursor start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the precursor mode has been entered. The precursor start command includes information indicating the transition to the precursor mode, as well as information indicating the value of the precursor counter (number of precursor games) set in step S903. Therefore, by receiving the precursor start command, the display control device 81 can not only shift to the precursor mode but also know the number of precursor games at that time, and eventually to the CZ mode, AT mode, or the like. It is possible to grasp how many games after which the notification of winning should be performed.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process (FIG. 29), if an affirmative determination is made after the execution of step S808 or in step S807 (in the case of being in the CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S809 and the AT is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. Set (store) the mode winning flag. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the winning state of the AT mode.

In addition, in the case of the CZ mode, the setting process of the precursor mode in step S808 is not executed, the transition to the precursor mode and the number of precursor games are not set, but the transition to the AT mode is won during the CZ mode. In this case, it is configured to notify the winning when the CZ mode ends. That is, when the transition to the AT mode is won during the CZ mode, the notification that the transition to the AT mode is won waits until the number of CZ games set as the number of continuous games in the CZ mode is exhausted. It is supposed to be done. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the lottery for transition to AT mode is won during CZ mode, the transition to AT mode is not performed immediately after winning the lottery for transition, but the end of CZ mode is terminated. Wait and be done. That is, the transition to the AT mode is also waited by the CZ mode. In that sense, the duration (execution period) of the CZ mode can be said to be the waiting period for the winning notification and the transition to the AT mode.

After the execution of step S809, the AT winning command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S810, and then the AT lottery process ends. The AT winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S806 (if it is determined that the AT mode has not been won), the process proceeds to step S811 to determine whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When the CZ mode flag is not stored, that is, in the normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S812. In the CZ mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to the CZ mode (winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, as a trigger for the CZ mode transition lottery, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell , Push order bell, watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery.

The trigger of the CZ mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won, and the 3 bets that carry over the second BB. The configuration may be such that only a part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode as a game is a trigger.

After acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table in step S812, the CZ mode transition lottery is executed in step S813. In the CZ mode transition lottery, the CZ mode transition lottery is performed based on the acquired CZ mode transition lottery table and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the following step S814, it is determined whether or not the transition to the CZ mode is won in the CZ mode lottery process of step S813.

If it is determined in step S814 that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S815 to execute the precursor mode setting process. This process is the same as the precursor mode setting process in step S808, and performs the precursor game number lottery process, the precursor counter set, the precursor mode flag set, and the precursor start command set according to the flowchart of FIG. 31. ..

After the execution of step S815, the CZ mode winning flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S816. The CZ mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In the following step S817, a CZ winning command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process ends. The CZ winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S811 (in CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S818 to acquire a lottery table for adding the number of games for CZ mode from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105. In the CZ mode game number addition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the winning probability of the CZ mode game number addition is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, as an opportunity for the additional lottery, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push Sequential bell and watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as an trigger for the additional lottery.

It should be noted that the trigger for adding the number of games in CZ mode is not limited to the above, and the second BB is carried over, for example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won. The configuration may be such that only a part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game serves as an opportunity.

After acquiring the CZ mode game number addition lottery table in step S818, the CZ mode game number addition lottery is executed in step S819. In the additional lottery, a lottery for adding the number of games in the CZ mode is performed based on the acquired lottery table for adding the number of games in the CZ mode and the counters for the lottery acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the following step S820, it is determined whether or not the player has won the CZ mode game number addition in the addition lottery of step S819.

If it is determined that the game number addition has not been won, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the game number addition has been won, the process proceeds to step S824 and is provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. A process of adding a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10) to the obtained CZ counter is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and by executing the process of this step, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is increased by a predetermined value (for example, 10 games) ( Will be added). The number of additional games in the CZ mode does not necessarily have to be a fixed number, and for example, a plurality of types of games may be selected by a lottery for the number of additional games.

In the following step S822, a CZ addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process ends. The CZ addition command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of games added in the CZ mode has been won. The CZ addition command includes information indicating that the number of additional games has been won, as well as information indicating the number of additional games. Therefore, by receiving the CZ addition command, the display control device 81 can grasp the winning of the game number addition lottery, the number of additional games, and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode.

<Process for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. As described above, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1001, the lottery result of this game is grasped. In the following step S1002, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When the AT mode winning flag is stored, that is, when the AT mode is won, the process proceeds to step S1003, and the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. Judge whether or not. In the present embodiment, as the AT mode, the first AT mode and the second AT mode in which the additional performance (the winning probability of the additional lottery) in the AT mode is different are set, and each AT mode is predetermined to the display windows 26L to 26R. It is configured to shift when the symbol combination (shift roll) is stopped and displayed. The 1st AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the push order notification for stopping and displaying the transition result for the 1st AT should be executed, and the 2nd AT notification flag is the 2nd AT. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the push order notification for stopping and displaying the transition result for is to be executed. The first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set when the precursor mode ends, and is cleared when the first AT mode or the second AT mode is entered.

When a negative determination is made in step S1003, that is, when the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d, but neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is stored. It means that the player is in the precursor mode after winning the AT mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1004, and a process of acquiring an additional lottery table after winning and before winning notification is executed from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, that is, when the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d and either the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is stored. , It means that the precursor mode at the time of winning the AT mode has ended, but the transition to the first AT mode or the second AT mode has not yet been performed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1005, and the process of acquiring the additional lottery table before the transition after the winning notification is executed from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the additional lottery table before the winning notification after the winning is compared with the additional lottery table before the transition after the winning notification, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before the transition after the winning notification is won after the winning. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before notification. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by chance B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before the winning notification after winning has a 5% probability of winning, whereas the additional lottery after the winning notification and before the transition In the additional lottery using the table, there is a 7% probability of winning, and in the situation before the transition to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after the winning notification than before the AT mode winning notification.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002 (when the AT mode winning flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S1006 to determine whether or not the first AT flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. The first AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode is in progress. Here, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the first AT mode, the AT mode winning flag, the first AT notification flag, and the second AT notification flag stored in the various flag storage areas 106d are cleared, and the first is It is configured to store the 1AT flag. Therefore, the case of making a negative determination in step S1002 means that the state is in the state of shifting to either the first AT mode or the second AT mode.

If it is determined in step S1006 that the first AT flag is stored (in the first AT mode), in step S1007, the additional lottery table for the first AT is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1007 that the first AT flag is not stored, it means that the second AT mode is in progress. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1008, and the additional lottery table for the second AT is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the 1st AT additional lottery table and the 2nd AT additional lottery table are compared, the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table uses the 1st AT additional lottery table. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, the additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table has a 10% probability of winning, whereas the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table is used. In the lottery, there is a 20% probability of winning, and in the situation after the transition to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

After the additional lottery table is acquired by any of the processes of step S1004, step S1005, step S1007, and step S1008, the additional lottery is executed in step S1009. Then, in step S1010, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is not won, the AT addition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery is won, the AT additional winning flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S1011. The AT additional winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the additional number of continuous games in the AT mode has been won. In the following step S1012, the precursor mode setting process is executed, and then the AT addition process is terminated. The process of step S1012 is the same as the precursor mode setting process in step S808 of FIG. 29, and according to the flowchart of FIG. 31, the precursor game number lottery process, the precursor counter set, the precursor mode flag set, and the precursor start command. Do the set.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 27), after executing the process of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order winning combination. The push order combination is a result including the push order bell, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C. Normal rip A, normal rip B, and normal rip C are all results in which a plurality of re-games are duplicated and won, and the re-games that establish a prize may differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the normal lip A, the reels 32L, 32M, so that the first re-game winning is basically established regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop control of 32R is performed. On the other hand, in the normal lip B and the normal lip C, when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, respectively, so that the second re-game prize and the third re-game prize are established. When the stop control of 32R is performed and the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first re-game winning is established. ..

However, in these normal rip A, normal rip B, and normal rip C, even if any of the re-game prizes that have been won in duplicate is established, the privilege to be given is the re-game, and the re-game that is established. Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are game results in which the re-game winning is established regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop result differs depending on the operation order.

Then, in particular, the normal lip B and the normal lip C are the triggers for starting the AT mode, and after the AT mode winning flag is set, the notification that the transition to the AT mode may occur is executed. After that, after the first AT mode is started in the game in which the second re-game winning can be established, the AT mode winning flag is set, and then the notification that the transition to the AT mode can occur is executed. , The second AT mode is started in the game in which the third re-game winning can be established. That is, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the above notification (AT winning notification effect) is executed, and after the above notification is executed. However, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the game is such that the second re-game prize and the third re-game prize can be established.

When it is determined in step S608 that the push order winning combination is won, it is determined in step S609 whether or not any of the CZ mode flag, AT mode winning flag, or AT mode flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S610, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S608 or step S609, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the push order notification process executed in step S610, an outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 36 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 36A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light the display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, on the instruction monitor 68, at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and "." Can be displayed.

If it is possible to display the symbols of a plurality of patterns individually on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and 7 instead of the eight segments. It may be configured to use 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be composed of a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning mode is advantageous for the player. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1 The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a situation in which push order notification can occur is satisfied after shifting to an advantageous section. .. Further, the light is turned off when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during a specific section where the benefit of push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is not a specific section even if it is an advantageous section. It serves as a section indicator (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the game machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the player is suppressed from overlooking because it is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy for the player who advances the game to acquire the medal.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that it is twice as bright as the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when they are in the lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is defined (so that the illuminance is doubled). From such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a number is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 37B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 37C, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears from the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

<Processing for push order notification>
Next, the push order notification process executed in step S610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. The case where the CZ mode flag is not set and the AT mode winning flag is set is a case where the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode is won. In this case, in step S1103, it is determined whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the AT mode winning flag is set but these AT notification flags are not set, it means that the AT mode transition lottery has been won but the precursor mode is still in progress. In this case, in this game, the push order notification is not generated, and the push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal lip B or normal lip C. If the normal lip A or the push order bell is used instead of the normal lip B and the normal lip C, the main push order notification process is terminated as it is. If it is either normal lip B or normal lip C, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not it is normal lip B. In the case of the normal lip B, in step S1106, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the normal lip B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1107 to execute the process for starting the first AT mode.

That is, in step S1107, the first AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1108, the first AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The first AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT mode is started from this game. After that, in step S1009, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the second re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1110, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. In the display control device 81 that has received this push order command, as the push order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning, the push order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first and "Aim from the right! The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display such as "!", Voice navigation, and the like are performed, and the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning prize is notified.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the normal lip C is not the normal lip B, the process proceeds to step S1111. In step S1111, it is determined whether or not the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set instead of the second AT notification flag, the push order notification process ends as it is. If the normal lip C is won and the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1112 to execute the process for starting the second AT mode.

That is, in step S1112, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1113, the second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second AT mode is started from this game. After that, in step S1114, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the third re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1115, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. In the display control device 81 that has received this push order command, as the push order notification effect corresponding to the third re-game winning, the push order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first and "Aim from the right! The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display such as "!", Voice navigation, and the like are performed, and the symbol corresponding to the third re-game winning prize is notified.

If it is determined in step S1101 that the CZ mode flag is set, or if the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1102 and the AT mode is already in progress, the process proceeds to step S1116. In step S1116, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order bell. If it is not the push order bell, the push order notification process ends as it is. If it is a push order bell, it is determined in step S1117 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. When the CZ mode flag is set, in step S1118, it is determined whether or not the notified flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The notified flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell is already performed in the CZ mode, and includes the end of the CZ mode (including the transition to the AT mode). ) Is a flag cleared. If the notified flag is set, the push order notification process ends as it is. If the notified flag is not set, the process of setting the notified flag is executed in step S1119.

When the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag in step S1117, or after the processing of step S1119 is executed, in step S1120, the first small winning combination is won according to the type of the push order bell this time. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is performed. Then, in step S1121, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process is executed. The process for notifying the push order is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received this push order command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed.

<Process for updating the number of games>
Next, the game number update process in step S314 in the lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. In the game number update process, a process of updating the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is executed.

In the game number update process, first, in step S1201, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. Specifically, the current gaming state is the internal state after the first BB winning, the internal state after the second BB winning, the non-internal state before the first BB winning, the non-internal state before the second BB winning, the first BB state or the second BB. Know which of the states it is.

In the following step S1202, whether or not the number of bets in the current game corresponds to the current gaming state, that is, whether or not it matches the number of bets set as a specific specified number for the current gaming state. Is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific specified number is set to 3 for each of the above states, but in this step, whether or not the game is started with the bet number set to 3 is determined. judge. For example, in the internal state after winning the second BB, if the game is started with the number of bets set to 3, this step is judged affirmatively, and if the number of bets is set to 2 and the game is started, this step is judged negative. .. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process for updating the number of games is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1202, that is, if the current game is started with the number of bets of the specific specified number (3), the process proceeds to step S1203, and the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second BB state flag is stored. When either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored (in the case of the BB state), the process for updating the number of games is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (when it is not in the BB state), the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the precursor mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. To judge. The precursor mode flag is a flag indicating that the precursor mode is in progress as described above.

When the precursor mode flag is stored (in the precursor mode), the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the precursor counter is executed in step S1205. As a result, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated. Since the process for updating the number of games is executed at the start of the game, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated when the game is started.

After the execution of step S1205, the precursor game number update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1206. The precursor game number update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated. By receiving the precursor game number update command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated by the main control device 101.

After the execution of step S1206 or when a negative determination is made in step S1204 (when not in the precursor mode), it is determined in step S1207 whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. The CZ mode flag is a flag indicating that the CZ mode is in progress as described above.

When the CZ mode flag is stored (in the CZ mode), the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the CZ counter is executed in step S1208. As a result, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is updated. In the following step S1209, a CZ game number update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ game number update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode has been updated.

After the execution of step S1209 or when a negative determination is made in step S1207 (when not in the CZ mode), it is determined in step S1210 whether or not the AT mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag indicating that the AT mode is in progress as described above.

When the AT mode flag is stored (when the AT mode is in progress), the process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter value is executed in step S1211. As a result, the number of remaining games in AT mode is updated. In the following step S1212, the AT game number update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The AT game number update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the AT mode has been updated. After the end of step S1212 or when a negative determination is made in step S1210 (when not in AT mode), the game number update process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S1202 (when the number of bets does not match the specific specified number corresponding to the current gaming state (when the game is started with the number of bets set to 2)). The process of S1203 to step S1212 is skipped, and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode and the CZ mode is not updated. The duration of the precursor mode and CZ mode functions as a waiting period for waiting for winning notification, etc., but if the number of remaining games in each mode is not updated, the end game of each mode will be postponed by that amount. Become. That is, the waiting period is extended.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the CZ mode, the AT mode, and the like is performed according to the game result of the game. It should be noted that this process is executed when it is determined that all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped (when the game is finished).

First, in step S1301, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed, and in step S1302, whether or not the number of bets of this game is a specific specified number defined in the state grasped in step S1301. Is determined. These processes are the same as those in steps S601 and S602 of FIG. 27 and steps S1201 and S1202 of FIG. 39. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, that is, if the number of bets does not match the specific specified number corresponding to the current gaming state (when the game is played with the number of bets set to 2), the processes after step S1303 are performed. No, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, that is, if the number of bets matches the specific specified number corresponding to the current gaming state (when the game is played with the number of bets set to 3), the process proceeds to step S1303 and the third Execute 1 game number management process. In the first game number management process, the precursor mode is terminated, or a process for notifying the winner when the transition to the AT mode is won during the normal mode is executed.

In the first game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. .. When neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (when it is not in the BB state), the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. To do. When the CZ mode flag is not stored (when not in the CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether or not the precursor mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d.

When the precursor mode flag is stored (in the precursor mode), the process proceeds to step S1404, and it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. When the value of the precursor counter is not 0, that is, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 1 or more, the first game number management process is terminated in order to continue the precursor mode.

On the other hand, when the value of the precursor counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1405, and the precursor mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas 106d are cleared (erased). To do. As a result, the precursor mode ends. In the following step S1406, the precursor end command is set as the output target to the display control device 81. The precursor end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the precursor mode has ended.

After the execution of step S1406, it is determined in step S1407 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode winning flag is set when the transition to the AT mode is won.

When the AT mode winning flag is stored, it means that the precursor mode executed by the AT mode winning in the normal mode has ended. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1408, and the AT mode of this time is set. The AT type determination process of whether the type is set to the first AT mode or the second AT mode is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of types of AT modes are set, that is, a first AT mode and a second AT mode in which additional performance is given preferential treatment over the first AT mode. In the AT type determination process, For example, the current AT mode type is randomly determined by lottery according to the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, and the like.

In step S1409, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode is determined based on the processing result of step S1408. In the first AT mode, the first AT notification flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1410, and then the first AT winning notification command is issued as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1411. set. When the first AT notification flag is set, the push order notification process (FIG. 38) performs a process for generating the push order notification for the second re-game winning. Further, the first AT winning notification command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the transition to the first AT mode has been won and that the notification of the winning should be performed.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1409 (when the transition to the second AT mode is won), the second AT notification flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1412, and then in step S1413. The second AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. When the second AT notification flag is set, the push order notification process (FIG. 38) performs a process for generating the push order notification for the third re-game winning prize. Further, the second AT winning notification command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the transition to the second AT mode has been won and that the notification of the winning should be performed.

After executing step S1411 or step S1413, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1401 (in the BB state), when a positive judgment is made in step S1402 (in CZ mode), or when a negative judgment is made in step S1403 (precursor mode). (If not inside), the first game number management process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1407 (when the terminated precursor mode is not triggered by the winning of the AT mode in the normal mode), the process proceeds to step S1414, and the AT addition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. Judge whether or not. The AT addition flag is set when the number of games is won in the AT mode, and this step is triggered by the winning of the number of games in the AT mode in the precursor mode completed in step S1406. It is to judge whether or not it is a thing.

In the present embodiment, as a situation of shifting to the precursor mode, in addition to the case where the transition to the CZ mode is won during the normal mode and the case where the number of games is added during the AT mode, the situation is during the normal mode. There is a case where the transition to the CZ mode is won, but in this case, while the CZ mode winning flag is stored in the above-mentioned various flag storage areas 106d, neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT addition flag is stored. Negative determination is made in each of step S1407 and step S1414.

If it is determined in step S1414 that the AT addition winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1415, and the AT addition winning flag is cleared (erased). In the following step S1416, the additional game number lottery process is executed. In the additional game number lottery process, the additional game number table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the number of additional games this time is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 34, the number of additional games table is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the addition. For example, the addition is usually performed with Lip A as an opportunity. In that case, an average of 150 games will be added, while an average of 15 games will be added if Cherry A is used as an opportunity. The addition will be performed at an opportunity that makes it difficult to win the additional lottery. The case is set so that the number of additional games is larger.

After executing the number of additional games lottery process in step S1416, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1417. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the AT mode. In the following step S1418, an AT addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The AT addition command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of games in the AT mode has been added. The AT addition command includes information indicating the number of additional games in addition to the information indicating that the lottery for adding the number of games has been won. Therefore, by receiving the AT addition command, the display control device 81 can grasp the winning of the number of games addition, the number of additional games, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode. After the execution of step S1418 or when a negative determination is made in step S1414, the first game number management process ends.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process (FIG. 40), after executing the first game number management process in step S1303, the second game number management process is executed in step S1304. In the second game number management process, the start and end of the CZ mode are controlled, and a process for notifying the winner when the transition to the AT mode is won during the CZ mode is executed.

In the second game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (when it is not in the BB state), the process proceeds to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not the precursor mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. To do. If the precursor mode flag is not stored (not in the precursor mode), the process proceeds to step S1503, and it is determined whether or not the CZ mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. The CZ mode winning flag is set when the transition to the CZ mode is won.

If it is determined that the CZ mode winning flag is stored, the CZ mode winning flag is cleared (erased) in step S1504. Next, in step S1505, the CZ mode flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, the CZ mode is started (shifts to the CZ mode). In a subsequent step S1505, a process of setting (inputting) a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 games) as an initial value of a CZ counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for grasping the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by 1 for each game. The initial value of the CZ counter (the number of initial games in the CZ mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games, and for example, a plurality of types of games may be selected by a lottery for the number of additional games.

After that, in step S1507, the CZ start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode has been entered. The CZ start command includes information indicating the transition to the CZ mode and information indicating the number of initial games in the CZ mode. Therefore, by receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 can grasp the transition to the CZ mode and the number of continuous games in the CZ mode. After the execution of step S1507, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501 (in the BB state) or in the affirmative determination in step S1502 (in the precursor mode), the second game number management process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503 (when the CZ mode winning flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S1508 to determine whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the CZ mode flag is stored (in the CZ mode), it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0.

When the value of the CZ counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1510, and the CZ mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas 106d are cleared (erased). As a result, the CZ mode ends. In the following step S1511, the CZ end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The CZ end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode has ended.

After the execution of step S1511, it is determined in step S1512 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. When the AT mode winning flag is stored, that is, when the transition to the AT mode is won during the CZ mode, the AT type determination process is executed in step S1513, and the first AT mode is entered in step S1514. Judge whether or not the transition was won. If the transition to the first AT mode is won, the process proceeds to step S1515, and the first AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the following step S1516, the first AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1514 (when the transition to the second AT mode is won), the process proceeds to step S1517, and the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. After that, in step S1518, the second AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

After executing step S1516 or step S1518, if a negative judgment is made in step S1508 (when not in CZ mode), a negative judgment is made in step S1509 (when the value of the CZ counter is not 0), or a negative judgment is made in step S1512. In the case (when the transition to the AT mode is not won during the CZ mode), the second game number management process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process (FIG. 40), after executing the second game number management process in step S1304, the third game number management process for terminating the AT mode is executed in step S1305. The details of the third game number management process will be described later.

After executing the third game number management process in step S1305, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the 1st AT start flag is a flag set in the game in which the 2nd re-game winning is possible when the transition to the 1st AT mode occurs. More specifically, the 1st AT notification flag is used. This is a flag that is usually set at the start of a game in which Lip B is won in the set situation. That is, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result.

When the first AT start flag is set, the process of clearing the first AT start flag in step S1307 and setting the first AT flag in various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1308. As described above, when the first AT flag is set, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the first AT is performed.

When it is determined in step S1306 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the second AT start flag is a flag set in the game in which the third re-game winning is possible when the transition to the second AT mode is caused. More specifically, the second AT notification flag is used. This is a flag that is set at the start of a game that normally wins Lip C in the set situation. That is, the second AT start flag is not set based on the winning result.

When the second AT start flag is set, the process of clearing the second AT start flag in step S1310 and setting the second AT flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1311. If it is determined in step S1309 that the second AT start flag is not set, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is. As described above, when the second AT flag is set, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the second AT is performed.

After executing the process of step S1308 or step S1311, the process of inputting 50 to the AT counter described above is executed in step S1312. As described above, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and in the present embodiment, 50 games are set as the initial number of games in either the first AT mode or the second AT mode. .. The number of initial games may be different between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or the number of initial games may be determined by lottery. In this case, the number of initial games may be larger in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In step S1313, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed, and in step S1314, a process of setting the AT mode flag is executed. The AT mode flag is for the CPU 102 to know that the AT mode is in progress. Then, in step S1315, the process of setting the AT start command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the winning result is terminated.

Next, the third game number management process in step S1305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. In the third game number management process, a process of terminating the AT mode is executed.

In the third game number management process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. When neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (when it is not in the BB state), the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 106d. To do.

When the AT mode flag is stored (when the AT mode is in progress), it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the value of the AT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. When the value of the AT counter is 0 (when the number of games remaining in the AT mode is 0), the process proceeds to step S1604, and the AT mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 106d is cleared (erased). As a result, the AT mode ends. After that, in step S1605, the AT end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The AT end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode has ended.

After executing step S1605, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1601 (in the BB state), a negative judgment is made in step S1602 (not in AT mode), or a negative judgment is made in step S1603 (remaining game in AT mode). If the number is 1 or more), the third game number management process is terminated.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, the section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, shifting to the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The first section display process is a process performed in step S315 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case where at least a specific section in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, in step S1703, a process of adding 1 to the normal counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The normal counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games started as a normal section instead of an advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S1703, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1705. Then, in step S1706, the process of setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1707, a process of starting counting the number of games in the advantageous section, and more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e is performed. As described above, the advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section.

After executing the advantageous section transition game process in step S1708, or when it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous section flag is set, whether or not the CZ mode flag or AT mode flag is set in step S1708. To judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell can be performed in the AT mode or the CZ mode, and the CZ mode flag or the AT mode flag is set. Can be said to be a situation in which the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. When any of these flags is set, the display of the section indicator is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8 in step S1709.

When it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, in step S1710, a process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, in step S1710, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit is performed. That is, the process for ending the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

Even when it is determined in step S1704 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, or when the advantageous section flag or the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the CZ mode flag is set. If the or AT mode flag is not set and the mode is normal, the process proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the display start processing of the section display in step S1709 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1710, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, a process of adding 1 to the winning combination second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1711 or step S1712, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1713. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1714, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1713 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units composed of seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and the individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the role ratio monitor 77, and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1714, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1713 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e on the combination monitor 77 display the four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Perform display control. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 digits after the decimal point, for example, "0.5012". The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1714, the section display first process is terminated.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing of step S1713, the display control of the combination monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the number of the fifth digit after the decimal point. Further, among the role ratio monitors 77, since "0" is basically displayed on the first display unit 77a, the first display unit 77a may not be provided, or the first display unit 77a may be printed. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (Processing for winning results) will be performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S1802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. After executing the process of step S1802, in step S1803, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1803, the number of inserted cards (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on the condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is used as the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. By adding to, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S1803, the remaining number of games management process is executed in step S1804, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1805.

The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of games (1500 games) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is there. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the number of advantageous section games AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section), the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode), the CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode), and the precursor counter. It is grasped whether or not the total with (the number of remaining games in the precursor mode) is equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section or more than the upper limit number of games. Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. .. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is calculated from the increase / decrease number in the advantageous section. Understand whether there are many situations. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1806, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games 1500, or whether or not the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S1807, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1808, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1809, a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed, and in step S1810, a process of clearing the normal counter is performed.

In the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S1809, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time are returned to the initial values. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, the various CZ mode flags, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY, the precursor counter for the precursor mode, the counter for the number of continuous games such as CZ mode, etc. are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using push order notification, and RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters.

After the execution of step S1810 or when a negative determination is made in step S1806 (when the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number), this section display number 2 Finish the process. In the second section display process, as in step S1201 and step S1202 of the game number update process (FIG. 39), the current game state grasping process and whether or not the bet number corresponds to the game state The judgment process is not executed. Therefore, the number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games executed in the advantageous section) and the number of MY (the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section minus the number of medals inserted in the advantageous section) are calculated by the game. Regardless of the number of bets when the game is played, it is updated each time the game is executed (step S1802). That is, the update process of the number of games executed in the advantageous section and the number of medals increased / decreased is different from the case of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, CZ mode, and AT mode, even when the game is played with the number of bets set to 2. Will be executed.

<About the display of the push order display and section display and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 46, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won by winning a small role 7 (watermelon), the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the next game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established ( Advantageous section game number AG count) is started. Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won in the advantageous section and the push order notification can occur due to the winning notification and the AT mode flag being set, the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. As a result, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is finished and the eighth display is finished when the third reel stop ON operation is performed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, and the final game in the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. Is finished. In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is completed (by the section display second process which is a process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the final game of the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted from the next game of the game that won the transition lottery to the advantageous section, while the push order notification is performed only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. appear. In other words, the push order notification does not occur in the section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off even in the advantageous section. That is, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is lit, at least the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). It is possible to clearly grasp. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the push order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the push order notification is illegally enjoyed even though it is not an advantageous section. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being carried out.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. When a new command is received, in step S1902, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or after the process of step S1902 is executed, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of the normal process. If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current bet operation is executed in step S1904.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or after the process of step S1904 is executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and corresponds to the lottery result in addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process. Precursor start command, precursor game number update command, CZ winning command, CZ game number update command, CZ addition command, AT winning command, AT game number set in the process (Fig. 27) and game number update process (Fig. 39) There is an update command etc. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1906.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, or after the process of step S1906 is executed, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the respective stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). It is a stop command command set in. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S1908 executes each stop operation effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, or after the process of step S1908 is executed, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, the precursor end command, CZ start command, CZ end command, 1st AT winning notification command, 2nd AT winning notification command, AT set in the winning result handling process (Fig. 40) and bonus state processing (Fig. 24). There are a start command, an AT addition command, an AT end command, a first BB start command, a second BB start command, a first BB end command, a second BB end command, and the like. In the case of these commands at the time of all stops, the effect setting process at the time of all stops is executed in step S1910.

If a negative determination is made in step S1909, or after the process of step S1910 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1911, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the connection is made without going through the main control device 101. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is the push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal lip B. When the push order notification command is set in the game which is the normal lip B, it means that it is the start game of the first AT mode. In this case, the push order corresponding to the second re-game winning in step S2104. Execute the setting process for performing the notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the lottery result of this game is normal lip C. When the push order notification command is set in the game which is the normal lip C, it means that it is the start game of the second AT mode. In this case, the push order corresponding to the third re-game winning in step S2106. Execute the setting process for performing the notification effect.

The case of making a negative judgment in step S2105 means that the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning, and in this case, it corresponds to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination in step S2107. The setting for performing the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the lottery result of the current game is not the push order winning combination, it is determined in step S2108 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the specific winning combination. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is unlikely to appear as a lottery result of each game (it is difficult to win), and in this embodiment, chance eyes A to chance eyes C and cherry A to cherry C And watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition winning is more likely to be triggered by the lottery result other than the specific combination. If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the specific combination notification process is executed in step S2109. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

After the execution of step S2104, step S2106, step S2107, or step S2109, it is determined in step S2110 whether or not the CZ game number addition command is received. When the CZ game number addition command is received, the setting process of the CZ game number addition effect is executed in step S2111. In the setting process of the CZ game number addition effect, the addition effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed as a notification corresponding to the addition of the remaining games in the CZ mode. The mode of the addition effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the addition is performed. For example, the number of addition games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the addition is performed. The aspect may be included, or for example, the so-called post-addition effect in which the addition effect is executed in a situation where the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is a predetermined number (for example, the remaining one game) may include the aspect. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S2110, or after the process of step S2111 is executed, the bonus medium effect setting process is executed in step S2112, and the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2113. In the following step S2114, the continuous effect standby process is executed, and in step S2115, the continuous effect execution process is executed. Each process of steps S211 to S2115 will be described in detail later.

After the execution of step S2115, in step S2116, other start-time effect setting processes are executed, and then the main start-time effect setting process ends. In step S2116, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process for notifying that the operation has been accepted by turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 is performed.

<Continuous production>
The continuous production according to the present embodiment performs a series of productions over a plurality of games, and notifies whether or not the transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode is won in the final game. At that time, the continuous effect is adjusted to the progress of the precursor mode so that the notification of winning the transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode is performed at the end timing of the precursor mode set by the main control device 101. The start timing (start game of continuous production) is controlled.

However, as described above, when the game is played with a bet number that does not match the specified specified number (when the start lever 41 is operated with the bet number set to 2), the remaining game in the precursor mode in the main control device 101. The numbers will not be updated, effectively extending the duration of the precursor mode. As a result, the winning notification game in the continuous production and the end timing of the precursor mode are not synchronized. For example, even though the winning notification in the AT mode is made in the continuous production, the push order for shifting to the AT mode. Inconveniences such as the notification effect not being easily executed may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the continuous effect is devised in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Hereinafter, the specific configuration will be described in detail.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process of step S2113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous effect setting process is for performing the setting process for executing the continuous effect for this precursor (continuous effect for notifying the winning of the CZ mode or the like).

In the continuous effect setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received. If neither the first BB end command nor the second BB end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2202 to determine whether or not the precursor start command has been received. The precursor start command is a command transmitted when the main control device 101 shifts to the precursor mode, and this step determines whether or not the shift to the precursor mode has been started.

When the precursor start command is received (when the transition to the precursor mode is started), the process proceeds to step S2203, and the precursor flags are set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. This precursor flag corresponds to the fact that this continuous production is triggered by the winning of the number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode, in other words, the winning of each of the above modes is the end of the continuous production. This is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the notification (success effect or victory effect) should be executed.

In the following step S2204, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor flag is stored in each of the flag storage areas 183a. The pseudo-precursor flag is not triggered by the winning of the CZ mode or the like in this continuous production, in other words, the notification corresponding to the non-winning of each of the above modes as the end of the continuous production (failure production or defeat production). Is for the CPU 181 to know that the above should be executed.

If the pseudo precursor flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2205, and the number of continuous games in the precursor mode this time is grasped. This process is performed based on the precursor start command transmitted from the main control device 101. In the following step S2206, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the current precursor mode grasped in step S2205 is set in the precursor counters provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The precursor counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, in other words, the CPU 181 grasps the number of remaining games in the precursor mode. That is, in the present embodiment, each of the CPU 102 on the main control device 101 side and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side is configured to manage the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

After the execution of step S2206, in step S2207, the effect table for this precursor is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182.

Here, the outline of the continuous production will be described. In the present embodiment, a first continuous effect and a second continuous effect are provided as continuous continuous production. First, the first continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60.

The first continuous effect is composed of a start effect executed in the start game of the continuous effect, a preparatory effect executed after that, and a final effect executed after the preparatory effect. The final production of the first continuous production is a transformation production of whether or not the girl character 201 can be transformed into a wizard character 202, and the preparatory production is an item acquisition production to acquire items (transformation goods) at the time of the transformation production. It has become.

In the start effect of the first continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 58A, a character image 203 such as "I'm transforming!" Is displayed together with the girl character 201 on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. This start effect is executed, for example, when the start lever 41 is operated in the start game of the continuous effect. The start effect is executed over one game.

In the preparatory effect (item acquisition effect) of the first continuous effect, first, as shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 58 (c), the treasure box image 204 is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and then FIG. 59 ( As shown in a) to (c), the item image 205 is displayed on the display screen. The item image 205 is displayed so as to appear from the treasure box image 204.

As the treasure box effect in which the treasure box image 204 is displayed, a treasure box effect A (Fig. 58 (b)) and a treasure box effect B (Fig. 58 (c)) having different treasure box colors are prepared, and CZ depending on the color of the treasure box. It suggests the degree of expectation of winning such as mode. For example, the treasure chest effect B in which the red treasure box image 204b is displayed has a higher expectation of winning in the CZ mode or the like than the treasure box effect A in which the yellow treasure box image 204a is displayed.

In addition, as item effects in which the item image 205 is displayed, item effects A to C with different item types are prepared, which suggests the degree of expectation of winning such as CZ mode depending on the item type. There is. For example, the item effect C in which the stick image 205c is displayed has the highest expectation of winning in the CZ mode, the item effect A in which the toothbrush image 205a is displayed is the lowest, and the item effect B in which the pendant image 205b is displayed is the item effect B. It is located in the middle.

The preparatory effect is executed over one game. Specifically, when the start lever 41 is operated in the execution game of the preparatory effect (when the rotation of the reels 32L to 32R is started), the treasure box effect is started, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, after that, Alternatively, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated (for example, when the final stop operation is performed), the item effect is started.

In the final production (transformation production) of the first continuous production, as shown in FIG. 60, an image of the process in which the girl character 201 transforms into the witch character 202 is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and then the transformation is successful. The result video of whether to do or fail is displayed. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), a state in which the girl character 201 casts a spell for transforming is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the girl character 201 is displayed together with the spell. A state of being surrounded by dazzling light is displayed. When an item is acquired by the preparation effect, the girl character 201 in FIG. 60A is displayed in a state of possessing the acquired item. Then, when the notification corresponding to the winning of the CZ mode or the like is performed, as shown in FIG. 60 (c1), the result image (ending image) in which the light is settled and the witch character 202 that has succeeded in transformation appears is displayed. On the other hand, when the notification corresponding to the non-winning such as the CZ mode is performed, as shown in FIG. 60 (c2), the light is settled and the result image in which the girl character 201 who failed to transform appears is displayed.

The final effect is executed over two games. Specifically, when the start lever 41 is operated in the execution game of the final effect (when the rotation of the reels 32L to 32R is started), the image of FIG. 60A is displayed, and then a predetermined period is set. After a lapse of time, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated (for example, when the first stop operation is performed), the image of FIG. 60 (b) is displayed. After that, when the start lever 41 is operated in the next game (when the rotation of the reels 32L to 32R is started), the image of FIG. 60 (c1) or FIG. 60 (c2) is displayed.

Next, the second continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. The second continuous effect is also composed of a start effect executed in the start game of the continuous effect, a preparatory effect executed after that, and a final effect executed after the preparatory effect. The final production of the second continuous production is a battle production of whether or not the warrior character 211 can defeat the enemy character 212, and the preparatory production is an item for acquiring the item (weapon) in the above battle production. It is an item acquisition production to be acquired. The number of games to be executed and the start timing of each effect are the same as in the case of the first continuous effect.

In the start effect of the second continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), a character image 213 such as "Prepare for battle !!" is displayed together with the enemy character 212 on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. To. Further, in the preparatory effect (item acquisition effect) of the second continuous effect, first, the treasure box effect A (FIG. 61 (a)) or the treasure box effect B (FIG. 61 (b)) is executed as in the case of the first continuous effect. After that, as shown in FIGS. 62A to 62C, an item effect in which the item image 215 is displayed is executed. In the item production, for example, the item production C in which the gun image 215c is displayed has the highest expectation of winning in the CZ mode, the item production A in which the toothbrush image 215a is displayed is the lowest, and the knife image 215b is displayed. The production B is located in the middle.

In the final production (battle production) of the second continuous production, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), a video of the warrior character 211 attacking and a video of the enemy character 212 being attacked are displayed, and then the battle. By showing the ending of the above, a result image for notifying the presence or absence of winning in the CZ mode or the like is displayed. Specifically, when the notification corresponding to the winning of the CZ mode or the like is performed, as shown in FIG. 63 (c1), a video in which the enemy character 212 is defeated and the warrior character 211 wins is displayed, and the CZ mode or the like is displayed. When the notification corresponding to the non-winning is performed, as shown in FIG. 63 (c2), a video in which the warrior character 211 is defeated by the enemy character 212 is displayed.

Then, in the continuous production according to the present embodiment, the first continuous production or the second continuous production is executed over the number of games selected by lottery from the 3 to 5 games.

Returning to the explanation of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), in the effect table for the present precursor acquired in step S2207, as shown in FIG. 50, as the effect scenario for the present precursor, depending on the number of games executed for the continuous effect. Each production scenario is set for each of the first continuous production and the second continuous production. Each of these production scenarios is to produce a successful transformation or a battle victory as the final production, and is for notifying the winning of the CZ mode or the like. By the way, when the number of executed games is 3, the preparatory effect (item acquisition effect) is not executed, the final effect (transformation effect or battle effect) is executed after the start effect, and the number of executed games is 5 games. In the case, each effect scenario is configured so that the preparatory effect is executed twice after the start effect, and then the final effect is executed.

In this precursory effect table, the probability that 5 games are selected as the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect is the highest, and the probability that 3 games are selected is the lowest. For this reason, as the number of games executed in the continuous production increases, the degree of expectation of winning the CZ mode or the like increases.

After acquiring the effect table for this precursor in step S2207, the lottery process for continuous effect is executed in step S2208. In the continuous production lottery process, a random number for the continuous production lottery is acquired, and the acquired random number and the above-acquired production table for the present precursor are used to draw a lottery between the number of games to be executed for the continuous production and the production scenario to be executed. I do.

In the following step S2209, as the effect data setting process, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created. This scenario data table is stored (set) in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM 183. In the scenario data table, as shown in FIG. 51, information on the production video to be executed in each game is set in association with the number of consecutively executed games. In the present embodiment, the value of the continuous effect counter is used as the number of games to be executed for the continuous effect. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of executed games or the number of remaining games of the continuous effect, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the situation where the continuous effect is executed.

For example, when the precursor scenario K of FIG. 50 (a scenario in which the number of games in which the continuous production is executed is 5 and the transformation production of the girl character 201 is executed) is selected as the production scenario of the continuous production in the above lottery process. In the scenario data table, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), information corresponding to the production video of this precursor scenario K-1 (start production) is set as the information of the production to be executed in the first game, and the second game. The information of the production video corresponding to this precursor scenario K-2 (the production to acquire the pendant) is set as the information of the production to be executed in Information on the production video corresponding to the production to be acquired) is set, and information on the production video corresponding to this precursor scenario K-4 (production attempting transformation) is set as information on the production to be executed in the fourth game, and five games are set. As the information of the production to be executed by the eyes, the information of the production video corresponding to this precursor scenario K-5 (the production that succeeds in transformation) is set. The information of the production video may be identification information indicating the video data (unique information attached to each production video), or information indicating a storage area in which the video data is stored (address information of ROM 182). ) May be.

Further, in step S2209, in the scenario data table, the information of the production video of the present precursor preliminary scenario is set together with the production scenario of the continuous production. This precursory preliminary scenario is set separately from the original continuous effect (in other words, it is not set as the original continuous effect), and the number of precursor games is not updated during the execution of the continuous effect (bet). This is a preliminary production for (when the game is started with the number 2).

The precursory preliminary scenarios are provided for the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect. Specifically, different precursory preliminary scenarios are prepared for the precursor scenarios A to N shown in FIG. 50. ing. In addition, in each precursory preliminary scenario, a plurality of types of effects are prepared according to the number of games in which continuous effects are executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the present precursor scenario K is selected as the effect scenario of the continuous production, the present precursor preliminary scenario K corresponding to the present precursor scenario K is set in the scenario data table. .. This precursory preliminary scenario K is composed of a plurality of effects including the present precursor preliminary scenarios K1 to K-3 and transformation, and each effect corresponds to the value of the effect counter.

The present precursor preliminary scenario K-1 when the value of the continuous counter is 5, is related to the production content in relation to the present precursor scenario K-1. In the production of this precursory preliminary scenario K-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the character display 221 reminiscent of the start of the first continuous production such as "next transformation challenge" is the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. Is displayed in.

The precursory preliminary scenario K-2 when the value of the continuous counter is 4, suggests a red treasure chest as related to the present precursor scenario K-2, or raises the expectation thereof. In the production of this precursory preliminary scenario K-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the character display 222 such as "If it is a red treasure box, chance!" Is displayed by the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the girl character 201 and the treasure box image 204. It is displayed on the screen.

This precursory preliminary scenario K-3 when the value of the continuous counter is 3, suggests a stick (an item acquired in this precursory scenario K-3) as related to this precursory scenario K-3, or suggests its expectation. It has become something to enhance. In the production of this precursory preliminary scenario K-3, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the character display 223 such as "I want a stick!" Is displayed by the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the girl character 201 and the stick image 205c. It is displayed on the screen.

This precursory preliminary scenario-for transformation when the value of the continuous counter is 2 or 1, suggests the success of transformation as related to this precursory scenarios K-4 and K-5, or raises the expectation. ing. In this precursory preliminary scenario-transformation production, for example, as shown in Fig. 64 (d), a character display 225 such as "transformation daaaa" is displayed in a cut-in format together with an enlarged image 224 of the girl character's face. Is displayed. It should be noted that this precursory preliminary scenario-for transformation is a common preliminary effect in the present precursor scenarios A, C to E, and I to K for the first continuous production.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the present precursor scenario H is selected as the effect scenario of the continuous production, the present precursor preliminary scenario H corresponding to the present precursor scenario H is set. Also in this precursor preliminary scenario H, each of them is composed of a plurality of effects corresponding to the values of the effect counters.

The present precursor preliminary scenario H-1 when the value of the continuous counter is 4, is related to the production content in relation to the present precursor scenario H-1. In the production of this precursory preliminary scenario H-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 65A, the character display 231 reminiscent of the start of the second continuous production such as "next battle" is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. Is displayed.

The precursory preliminary scenario H-2 when the value of the continuous counter is 3, suggests a red treasure chest as related to the present precursor scenario H-2, or raises the expectation thereof. In the production of this precursory preliminary scenario H-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the character display 232 such as "I want a red treasure box" is displayed by the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the warrior character 211 and the treasure box image 204. It is displayed on the screen.

This precursor preliminary scenario when the value of the continuous counter is 2 or 1-for battle, suggests the victory of the battle as related to this precursor scenarios H-3, H-4, or raises the expectation. ing. In this precursory preliminary scenario-battle production, for example, as shown in Fig. 65 (c), a character display 235 such as "Go !!" is displayed in a cut-in format along with an enlarged image 234 of the warrior character's face. Is displayed. It should be noted that the preliminary production for this precursor scenario-battle is a common preliminary production for the precursor scenarios B, F to H, and L to N for the second continuous production.

Returning to the description of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), after executing the effect data setting process (scenario data table creation process) in step S2209, it was provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 in step S2210. Set the value in the production standby counter. The effect standby counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of standby games until the start of continuous effect. For example, if the number of continuous games (remaining games) in the precursor mode grasped in step S2205 is 10 games, and the number of consecutive games selected in the lottery process in step S2208 is 4, the effect is produced. Set 6 as the value of the standby counter.

In step S2211, a value is set in a continuous effect counter provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. As described above, the continuous effect counter is for counting the number of executed games or the number of remaining games of the continuous effect. For example, the number of consecutive games selected in the lottery process in step S2208 is 4. In the case of a game, 4 is set as the value of the effect standby counter.

Next, in step S2212, the effect standby flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183, and then the continuous continuous setting process is completed. The effect standby flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for the start of continuous effect.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204 (when the pseudo precursor flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S2213 to clear the pseudo precursor flag stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2214, the value of the pseudo precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is cleared to 0. The pseudo precursor counter will be described later. After the execution of step S2214, the process proceeds to step S2205, and a process of grasping the number of continuous games or the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201 (when the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received), the process proceeds to step S2215 to determine whether or not the precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. judge. When the present precursor flag is stored, the process of acquiring the present precursor effect table in step S2207 is executed, and when the present precursor flag is not stored, the present continuous effect setting process is terminated.

<Process for notification of specific role>
The process for notifying the specific combination in step S2109 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specific combination notification process is for setting a continuous effect for pseudo-precursor (continuous effect for notifying non-winning such as CZ mode).

In the specific role notification process, first, in step S2301, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set the chance effect as the effect of the current game is executed. In the chance production, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), for example, the character "Chance !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the characters with the surprise mark are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Make them correspond and display each. In addition, the winning probability of the chance production lottery process may be different depending on the type of specific combination, the game state, the set value, and the like.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S2301 has been won. If the game is won, the chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of this game in step S2303.

After the execution of step S2303 or when a negative determination is made in step S2302 (when the chance production lottery is not won), in steps S2304 to S2306, the precursor start command, CZ addition command, or AT Determine if any of the winning commands are included. If any of these commands is included, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated, and if none of these commands is included, the execution lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2307.

The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode for expecting the player to have made the above transition (in other words, winning the CZ mode, etc.), although it has not actually transitioned to the precursor mode. In the embodiment, the period of the pseudo precursor mode is used to execute a continuous effect for notifying a non-winning such as a CZ mode. As the number of continuous games in the pseudo-precursor mode, the number of games that is larger than the number of games in the continuous production is often set as in the case of the precursor mode. At that time, in the period before the start of the continuous production, a fanning production (a production other than the continuous production) that makes the player expect to win is performed. Although this fanning effect is performed to some extent even during the period before the start of the continuous effect in the precursor mode, it is impossible or difficult for the player to clearly distinguish between the precursor mode and the pseudo precursor mode. ..

In step S2308, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery in the pseudo omen mode in step S2307 has been won. If it is not won, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S2309, and the pseudo precursor flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a. The pseudo precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo precursor mode is in progress.

Next, in step S2310, a pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. The pseudo-precursor effect table is for drawing a lottery for a continuous effect effect scenario in the case of notifying a non-winning such as CZ mode. In the pseudo-precursor effect table, as shown in FIG. 53, as an effect scenario for pseudo-precursor, each effect scenario according to the number of execution games of the continuous effect is set for each of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect. There is. Each of these production scenarios is a final production in which a transformation failure or a battle defeat is performed. In the pseudo-precursor effect table, the probability that 3 games are selected as the number of games for executing continuous effect is the highest, and the probability that 5 games are selected is the lowest.

After acquiring the pseudo precursor effect table in step S2310, the lottery process for continuous effect is executed in step S2311. In the continuous production lottery process, a random number for the continuous production lottery is acquired, and the acquired random number and the above-acquired pseudo precursor effect table are used to draw a lottery between the number of games to be executed for the continuous production and the production scenario to be executed. I do.

In step S2312, as the effect data setting process, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created and stored (set) in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM 183. In the scenario data table for the pseudo precursor, as in the scenario data table for the present precursor (FIG. 51), the information of the effect video to be executed in each game is set in association with the number of consecutively executed games. However, in the scenario data table for pseudo precursors, the information of the production video of the preliminary scenario is not set.

In step S2313, a value is set in a pseudo precursor counter provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The pseudo omen counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the pseudo omen mode. In step S2314, the value is set in the effect standby counter provided in the various counter areas 183b, and in the subsequent step S2315, the value is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The processes of steps S2314 and S2315 are the same as the processes of steps S2201 and S2211 in the continuous selection setting process (FIG. 49).

After the execution of step S2315, in step S2316, the effect standby flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the continuous continuous setting process is terminated.

<Processing for continuous production standby>
The process for waiting for continuous production in step S2114 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. The continuous effect standby process controls the start timing (start game) of each continuous effect for the main precursor and the pseudo precursor.

In the continuous effect standby process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the effect standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. When it is determined that the effect standby flag is stored (when the continuous effect is in the standby state), the process proceeds to step S2402, and it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a.

If it is determined that the precursor flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2403, and it is determined whether or not the precursor game number update command is received as the command at the start of this time. The precursor game number update command is a command indicating that the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated in the main controller 101. When it is determined that the precursor game number command has been received, the value of the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is subtracted by 1 in step S2404.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2402 (when the present precursor flag is not stored), it means that the pseudo precursor flag is stored. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2405 and the counter area 183b is reached. The value of the provided pseudo precursor counter is subtracted by 1.

After the execution of step S2404 or step S2405, the value of the effect standby counter provided in the counter area 183b is subtracted by 1 in step S2406. As a result, the number of waiting games until the continuous production is started is updated. In the following step S2407, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter is 0, that is, whether or not the number of waiting games until the start of continuous effect is 0.

If the value of the effect counter is not 0 (when the number of waiting games is 1 or more), the process for waiting for the continuous effect is terminated, assuming that the start of the continuous effect is continuously waited for. On the other hand, when the value of the effect counter is 0, the effect standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared (erased) in step S2408, and in the subsequent step S2409, the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared. Set (store) the continuous effect flag in. The continuous effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect should be executed and that the continuous effect is being executed. After the execution of step S2409 or when a negative determination is made in step S2401 (when the effect waiting flag is not stored), the continuous effect standby process ends.

Further, even when a negative determination is made in step S2403 (when the precursor game number command has not been received), the continuous production standby process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2404. That is, if the precursor game number command has not been received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has not been updated in the main control device 101, the subtraction process (update process) of the precursor counter and the effect standby counter is not executed.

<Processing for continuous production execution>
The process for executing the continuous effect of step S2115 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. The continuous effect execution process is continuous based on the scenario data for the present precursor set in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49) and the scenario data for the pseudo precursor set in the specific combination notification process (FIG. 52). The process of executing the effect is performed.

In the continuous effect execution process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not stored (when the situation is not such that the continuous effect should be executed), the process for executing the continuous effect is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag is stored (when the continuous effect should be executed), it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. judge. That is, it is determined whether the situation is such that the continuous effect for the present precursor should be executed or the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor should be executed.

If it is determined that the present precursor flag is stored (when the situation is such that the continuous effect for this precursor should be executed), the process proceeds to step S2503, and is the second BB start command received as the start command of this time? Determine if not. The second BB start command is a command indicating the start of the second BB state. If the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 while executing the continuous production for this omen, the second BB prize may be established and the second BB state may be started. This step determines whether or not such an initiation of the second BB state has occurred.

If the second BB start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not the precursor game number update command has been received as the current start command. If the command for updating the number of precursor games has been received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated by the main controller 101, the process proceeds to step S2505. In step S2505, based on the scenario data for the present precursor set in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), the effect of the present precursor scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), in a situation where the present precursor scenario H is set as the continuous effect for the present precursor, when the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is 3, this time. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect of this precursor scenario H-2 is executed in the game. In the following step S2506, the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is subtracted by 1, and then the process for executing the continuous effect is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504 (the command to update the number of precursor games has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2507, based on the scenario data for this precursor set in the continuous production setting process (FIG. 49). Execute the production of this precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous production counter at the time. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), in a situation where the present precursor scenario H is set as the continuous effect for the present precursor, when the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is 3, this time. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect of this precursor preliminary scenario H-2 is executed in the game.

After the execution of step S2504, the process for executing this continuous effect is terminated. That is, when the precursor game number command has not been received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has not been updated in the main controller 101 (in other words, when the effect of this precursor preliminary scenario is executed), the continuous effect counter. The subtraction process (update process) of is not executed.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2503 (when the second BB start command is received), the process proceeds to step S2508, and the scenario data table (for continuous production) stored in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM 183 is performed. Clear (erase) the production data of. In the following step S2509, the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared (erased), and then the continuous effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the continuous production being executed is canceled.

When the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated in the main control device 101 as in the case where the number of bets does not match the specified specified number (step S1203 in FIG. 39). If affirmative judgment is made in). However, in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is assumed that the bonus state will continue for a relatively long period of, for example, about 30 games. In this way, even if the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated as in the case where the number of bets does not match the specified number, if the period is expected to continue for a long period of time, a preliminary effect is provided. The structure is such that the continuous production itself is canceled without responding to the execution.

For example, even at the time of transition to the first BB state or the second BB state, if the preliminary effect is inserted as in the case where the 2-bet game is performed, a large amount of video data is used as the video data for this precursor preliminary scenario. It becomes necessary to prepare or store a large amount of such moving image data in the ROM 182. As a result, there is a concern that the burden on the game machine designer may increase and the capacity of the ROM 182 may be compressed. In addition, since the preliminary production is executed for a long time without the content of the continuous production progressing, there is an inconvenience that the player feels uncomfortable. In this regard, in the present embodiment, depending on the length of the period during which the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated, it is possible to use either the preliminary production or the continuous production itself to be canceled, so that each of the above inconveniences occurs. Can be suitably suppressed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2502 (when the situation is such that continuous production for pseudo precursors should be executed), the process proceeds to step S2510, and the scenario data for pseudo precursors set in the specific combination notification process (FIG. 52). Based on, the effect of the pseudo precursor scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is executed. In the following step S2511, the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is subtracted by 1, and then the process for executing the continuous effect is terminated. That is, in the situation where the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor should be executed, the execution process and the continuous effect of the pseudo precursor scenario set as the continuous effect are executed regardless of whether or not the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated. Executes counter subtraction processing (update processing).

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S1910 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command is received as the command at the time of total stop. When any of these commands is received, in step S2602, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the AT winning notification effect is performed in this game. In the AT winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as “AT confirmed”. When the 1st AT winning notification command is received, the AT winning notification effect corresponding to the 1st AT is performed, and when the 2nd AT winning notification command is received, the AT winning notification effect corresponding to the 2nd AT is performed. May be.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (when the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command has not been received), whether or not the AT start command has been received as the current total stop command in step S2603. To judge. When the AT start command is received, in step S2604, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the AT start effect is performed in the next game. In the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "AT start !!".

If a negative determination is made in step S2603 (when the AT start command has not been received), it is determined in step S2605 whether or not the AT end command has been received as the command for all stops this time. When the AT end command is received, in step S2606, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the AT end effect is performed in this game. In the AT end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), characters such as "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative determination is made in step S2605 (when the AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the CZ start command has been received as the current stop command. When the CZ start command is received, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ start effect is performed in the next game. In the CZ start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), characters such as "CZ mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative determination is made in step S2607 (when the CZ start command has not been received), it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the CZ end command has been received as the current stop command. When the CZ end command is received, in step S2610, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ end effect is performed in this game. In the CZ end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "CZ mode end".

If a negative determination is made in step S2609 (when the CZ end command has not been received), it is determined in step S2611 whether or not the precursor end command has been received as the current command for all stops. When the precursor end command is received, in step S2612 and step S2613, the precursor flag and the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 are cleared (erased).

If a negative determination is made in step S2611 (when the precursor end command is not received), it is determined in step S2614 whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 0. .. When the value of the continuous effect counter is 0, the pseudo precursor flag and the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared (erased) in steps S2615 and S2616.

In the following step S2617, it is determined whether or not the second BB state is being executed. If the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 while executing the continuous production for the pseudo precursor, the second BB prize may be established and the state may shift to the second BB state. This step determines whether or not the second BB state thus transitioned is being executed. If it is determined in step S2617 that the second BB state is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2618, and the pseudo precursor end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a. The pseudo precursor end flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2614 (when the value of the continuous effect counter is not 0), whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received as the current stop all command in step S2619. To judge. When any of these commands is received, in step S2620, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the bonus end effect is performed in this game. In the bonus end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), characters such as "BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the processes of step S2602, step S2604, step S2606, step S2608, step S2610, step S2613, step S2618 or step S2620, or if a negative determination is made in step S2619, other stop effects are produced in step S2621. After setting, the production setting process ends. In step S2621, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting of is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Production setting process during bonus>
The effect setting process during the bonus in step S2112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

In the bonus medium effect setting process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If it is determined that the pseudo precursor flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2702, and it is determined whether or not the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the current start command. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the start game of the bonus game. The bonus game starts from the next game in which the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the total number of medals paid out from the starting game reaches the upper limit payout number.

When the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received, the process of grasping the bonus type this time is performed in step S2703. More specifically, we will grasp whether this bonus game is based on the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize. Then, in step S2704, the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type grasped in step S2703 is set.

In the bonus effect, for example, after the bonus start effect shown in FIG. 67A is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, a moving image effect by animation in which a predetermined character or the like appears is executed. Further, a predetermined sound effect (directing sound) is also output from the speaker 64. The animation effect in the above case is set to, for example, repeat playback of a 5-minute animation movie. It should be noted that the effect progress on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be stopped at the end of the 5-minute animation movie, and only the sound effect may be repeated.

By the way, in the bonus game according to the present embodiment, the number of medals is reduced, which is not desirable for the player. Therefore, as the bonus effect, the start effect of FIG. 67 (a) and the start effect of FIG. 67 (b) are shown. It may be configured to display only the above animation without performing the end effect of.

After the execution of step S2704, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated. Further, even when the affirmative determination is made in step S2701 (when the continuous effect for pseudo precursors is being executed), the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated without executing the processes after step S2702. That is, if the second BB state is started while the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor is being executed, the continuation of the continuous effect is prioritized without starting the bonus effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2702 (when the first BB start command or the second BB start command has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2705 to determine whether the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed. .. If any of the BB states is being executed, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the pseudo precursor end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. If the pseudo precursor end flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2703 after clearing (erasing) the pseudo precursor end flag in step S2707. That is, if the second BB state is started while the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor is being executed, the bonus effect is controlled to be started after the continuous effect being executed is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S2705 or step S2706, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated as it is.

<About the flow of continuous production>
The flow of continuous production for this precursor will be described with reference to FIG. 68. Here, a case will be described in which the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second and fourth games from the start of the continuous production, and the remaining number of games in the precursor mode is not updated in those games. Further, as the continuous production for the present precursor, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), it is assumed that the present precursor scenario H (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected.

When the number of remaining games in the omen mode reaches four, the start effect of the omen scenario H-1 is executed as a continuous effect for the omen (FIG. 68 (a)). Then, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the production of this precursor preliminary scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as the preliminary production. (Fig. 68 (b)). After that, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the third game from the start of the continuous production, the production of this precursor scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table as the preparatory production (item acquisition production) is performed. It is executed (Fig. 68 (c)).

That is, the production of the main precursor scenario H-2 performed in two games from the start of the continuous production should be performed originally in the second game with the start production of the main precursor scenario H-1 in the first game of the continuous production. It is performed so as to be inserted between the preparatory production of this precursor scenario H-2. For this reason, since the 2-bet game is played in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated, and the end game of the precursor mode (the end game in which the winning notification should be performed in the continuous production). ) Is delayed by one game, the progress of the continuous effect is delayed accordingly, and the precursor mode and the continuous effect are synchronized.

When the player plays the game again with the number of bets set to 2 in the fourth game from the start of the continuous production, the production of this precursor preliminary scenario H-3 set in the scenario data table is executed as the preliminary production ( FIG. 68 (d). Similar to the case of this precursor scenario H-2, the production of this precursor scenario H-3 is also the preparation production of this precursor scenario H-2, which should have been originally performed in the second game, and the original three games. It is performed so as to be inserted between the battle production of this precursor scenario H-3, which should have been performed in the eyes.

Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the 5th and 6th games from the start of the continuous production, the final production of the precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 set in the scenario data ( (Battle effect) is executed (FIGS. 68 (e) and (f)), and winning notification such as CZ mode is performed in the sixth game from the start of continuous effect. In this case, the production of this precursor scenario H-4 that notifies the winning is executed in the game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 1 (the final game in the precursor mode), and the degree of progress of the continuous production The progress with the precursor mode is synchronized.

In this way, since the preliminary effect is additionally executed in the game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated, the number of games for which the continuous effect is executed was set to 4 games in the initial setting process. It is possible to extend the continuation of the continuous production by the amount of two games in which the progress of the mode is delayed, and to notify the winning of the CZ mode or the like in the sixth game from the start of the continuous production. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the end timing of the precursor mode and the end timing of the continuous effect due to the fact that the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated. For example, the winning notification of the AT mode is made in the continuous effect. Nevertheless, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the push order notification effect for shifting to the AT mode being difficult to be executed.

Further, it is assumed that the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the period after the transition to the precursor mode and before the start of the continuous production, and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the display control device 81 is configured to update the values of the precursor counter and the effect standby counter based on the reception of the precursor game number update command (see FIG. 54), the precursor mode is used. When the update of the remaining number of games is stopped, the update of the number of waiting games until the start of the production is also stopped in synchronization with it. That is, if the precursor mode is extended due to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode not being updated in the period after the transition to the precursor mode and before the start of the continuous effect, the start of the continuous effect is delayed accordingly.

In addition, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, unlike the case of the continuous effect for the present precursor, Preliminary production is not executed. That is, regardless of the number of bets at the time of executing the game, the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor is executed according to the initial setting. Further, even before the start of the continuous production for the pseudo precursor, the production standby counter is updated regardless of the number of bets at the time of executing the game, and the continuous production is started in the game according to the initial setting.

Next, the flow when the second BB prize is established during the execution of the continuous production for the present precursor and the state shifts to the second BB state will be described with reference to FIG. 69. Here, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, and the symbol combination (FIG. 13 (f)) corresponding to the second BB is stopped in the game at that time. Will be described as an example. Further, as the continuous production for the present precursor, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), it is assumed that the present precursor scenario H (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected.

As described above, in the game of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the basic style is to play in a 3-bet game under the internal state (carry-over state) of winning the second BB. However, in addition to the fact that the game in the 2-bet game is allowed, the 2nd BB prize can be established under the 2-bet game (see FIG. 26), so that the state may shift to the 2nd BB state in the middle of the continuous production. is assumed. In the game in which the second BB prize is established (2-bet game) and the transition period to the second BB state (execution period), the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated (see FIG. 39). In the embodiment, the continuous production is executed as follows.

When the number of remaining games in the omen mode reaches four, the start effect of the omen scenario H-1 is executed as a continuous effect for the omen (FIG. 69 (a)). After that, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the production of this precursor preliminary scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as the preliminary production. (Fig. 69 (b)). In the game at that time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB is stopped and the second BB prize is established, the continuous production that has been executed is stopped.

Then, the game shifts to the second BB state from the next game (the bonus game of the second BB is started), and the bonus effect is executed while shifting to the BB state. At that time, the precursor mode flag stored in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101 at the start of the bonus game is maintained as it is without being cleared. Further, also in the display control device 81, the precursor flag stored in the RAM 183 is maintained as it is without being cleared (see FIG. 55). That is, the information indicating that the precursor mode is in progress is retained internally.

Then, when the second BB state ends and the player starts the next game, the display control device 81 executes the game within the range of the remaining number of games in the precursor mode at that time (3 games in the example of FIG. 69). A possible continuous effect (continuous effect for this precursor) is drawn, and a new system data table is created (see the flow of NO, step S2215, and step S2207 in step S2201 of FIG. 49). That is, when the state shifts to the second BB state in the middle of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is temporarily stopped, and then a new continuous effect is executed as the second BB state ends.

For example, if this precursor scenario A (continuous production of three games in which the girl character 201 appears) is selected as a new continuous production, the player sets the number of bets to 3 in the next game after the second BB state ends. If so, the production of this precursor scenario A-1 is executed (FIG. 69 (c)). Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the second and third games from the start of the new continuous production, the final of the precursor scenarios A-2 and A-3 set in the scenario data. The production (transformation production) is executed (FIG. 69 (d)). As a result, winning notification such as CZ mode is performed.

If the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, the continuous effect is continued as it is (see FIG. 57). Then, when the continuous production is completed, the bonus production is executed during the remaining bonus period.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous production for this precursor, the execution game of the winning notification in the continuous production is delayed.

In the present embodiment, when a 2-bet game is played during the precursor mode, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated, and the end game of the precursor mode is delayed. On the other hand, since the continuous effect for this precursor that is executed during the precursor mode is set based on the precursor mode before the extension, if the continuous effect is executed as it is, the execution timing of the winning notification in the continuous effect It will be different from the end of the precursor mode. For this reason, even though the winning notification during the continuous production is notified, the inconvenience of not easily shifting to the CZ mode or the AT mode may occur, and there is a concern that the player's trust in the production may be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, when a 2-bet game is played during the execution of continuous production, the winning notification is executed so that the winning notification is performed in a game after the initially set winning notification execution game. The game is delayed. As a result, the timing of winning notification can be delayed in accordance with the extension of the precursor mode, and it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the precursor mode and the continuous production.

When a 2-bet game is played and the precursor mode is extended during the execution of the continuous effect for this precursor, the preliminary effect related to the continuous effect is executed to delay the execution game of the winning notification. ..

According to this configuration, it is possible to fill the gap in the effect due to the delay of the winning notification by the preliminary effect. At this time, for example, if the configuration is such that an effect unrelated to the continuous effect is executed as a preliminary effect, the player may be given the impression that the continuous effect has suddenly ended. Especially for the player who was watching the continuous production while expecting the winning, it may give the impression that the winning has disappeared, and there is a concern that the player may be confused. In this respect, in this configuration, since the effect related to the continuous effect is executed as the preliminary effect, the continuous effect executed before and after the preliminary effect can be suitably connected by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the continuous production is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

When the preliminary effect is executed, the continuous effect is executed in the subsequent 3-bet game.

In this configuration, when a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect and the precursor mode is extended, the preliminary effect is inserted in the middle of the continuous effect, and the continuous effect is restarted after the execution of the preliminary effect. That is, the continuous effect that would have been executed if the preliminary effect was not executed is executed after the preliminary effect is executed. For example, in the case of a story-style continuous production, if a part of the continuous production is missing, the flow of the production becomes difficult to understand, but according to this configuration, the lack of the production is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the flow of the production up to the winning notification in the same manner as when the preliminary production is not executed. That is, it is possible to delay the execution timing of the winning notification while trying to match the case where the preliminary effect is executed and the case where the preliminary effect is not executed.

Also, for example, after the preliminary effect is executed, a special effect different from the continuous effect is executed, or the preliminary effect is not executed in the first place, and after the 2-bet game is played, the exclusive effect is used when the precursor mode is extended. It is possible to change to directing, but since it is not possible to specify in advance when the 2-bet game will be played, no matter how many games remain in the precursor mode when the 2-bet game is played. It will be necessary to prepare a large number of dedicated effects (video data for dedicated effects, etc.) with different lengths so that they can be handled. For this reason, the burden of the production design is greatly increased, and there is a concern that the storage area of the original continuous production data and the data of other productions will be compressed due to the increase in the amount of production data. Further, when the dedicated effect is executed, it is necessary to perform the setting process for that purpose again, which may increase the processing load on the effect control. In this respect, in this configuration, since the settings for continuous production and the production data can be diverted, it is possible to eliminate the need for the setting processing for the dedicated production and the preparation of the production data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden of the effect design and an increase in the amount of data, and further suppress an increase in the processing load on the effect control.

In addition, if the configuration is such that a special effect other than the continuous effect is executed after the preliminary effect is executed, what if the 2-bet game is played again during the execution of the special effect and the precursor mode is extended? There is a risk that new measures will be required. In this respect, with this configuration, it is possible to deal with it by inserting a preliminary effect each time, and it is possible to eliminate the need for new measures. That is, there is an advantage that it is possible to flexibly deal with the case where the 2-bet game is played a plurality of times during the execution of the continuous production.

A plurality of types of preliminary effects are prepared according to the types of continuous effects, and when a 2-bet game is played and the precursor mode is extended, the preliminary effects corresponding to the types of continuous effects being executed are executed. In this configuration, the preliminary effect corresponding to the type of continuous effect being executed is executed, so that when the preliminary effect is executed, the player feels uncomfortable and the impression that the continuous effect is being performed is suppressed. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the continuous production is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

Prepare a preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order of each effect during the continuous effect, and if the 2-bet game is played and the precursor mode is extended, the effect that was planned to be executed if the 2-bet game is not performed ( For example, the preliminary effect (the effect of the present precursor scenario H-2) corresponding to the execution order of the present precursor scenario H-2 is executed. For example, if the same content is always executed regardless of which game during the continuous production, the flow of the continuous production is obstructed by the preliminary production, and the player feels uncomfortable or continuous. There is a concern that it may be difficult to understand the content of the production. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the preliminary effect of the content along the flow of the continuous effect can be executed, it is possible to preferably suppress the flow of the continuous effect from being obstructed by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and making it difficult to understand the contents of the continuous production, and it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the production effect due to the preliminary production.

In executing the preliminary effect, the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the 2-bet game is played. In this case, each time a delay of one game occurs in the precursor mode, the extension can be filled with the preliminary effect. Therefore, when the precursor mode is extended in the middle of the continuous effect, it is possible to synchronize the precursor mode and the continuous effect with a simple configuration.

The preliminary effect is set in addition to the continuous effect, and the preliminary effect is set in the game before the game in which the preliminary effect is executed. According to this configuration, since the preliminary effect is set in advance, even if the player suddenly plays the 2-bet game, the preliminary effect can be quickly and smoothly executed. Further, when a 2-bet game is played during continuous production, the control processing may be in a high load state depending on the execution status of other productions, but even in such a case, processing omission occurs. This can be suitably suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, all the preliminary effects that may be executed during the continuous effect are collectively set at the start of the continuous effect. Therefore, when the preliminary effect is executed in the second and subsequent games of the continuous effect. In addition to being able to smoothly execute the preliminary effect, it is also possible to execute the preliminary effect according to the setting when executing the preliminary effect in the start game (first game) of the continuous effect.

If a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, the preliminary effect is not executed. The continuous effect for pseudo precursors is executed independently of the precursor mode, but if a 2-bet game is played during the execution of a continuous effect that is not affected by such precursor mode, the preliminary effect is executed. By not using the configuration, the frequency of setting and executing the preliminary effect can be kept low, and the load of control processing can be reduced.

When the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated by the main control device 101, a command for updating the number of precursor games to that effect is transmitted to the display control device 81.

Since the control process related to the game effect is entrusted to the display control device 81, the processing load of the main control device 101 can be reduced. However, since the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is managed on the main control device 101 side, there is a possibility that there is a discrepancy in the recognition of the number of remaining games between the main control device 101 and the display control device 81, and the precursor mode is extended. However, there is a concern that the execution game of the winning notification cannot be appropriately delayed. In this regard, in this configuration, since a command for updating the number of precursor games indicating that the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated is output to the display control device 81, whether or not the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated in the main control device 101. The display control device 81 can preferably grasp this. As a result, even if the processing is shared between the main control device 101 and the display control device 81, it is possible to suppress a discrepancy in the recognition of the number of remaining games, and the winning notification is executed for the extension of the precursor mode. It is possible to delay the game appropriately.

When the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for this precursor, the continuous effect being executed is stopped and the bonus effect is executed.

If the player shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous production for this precursor, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated during the execution period of the bonus game of the second BB, and the precursor mode is displayed for a relatively long period of time. The end game is delayed. Therefore, if the continuous production is continued as it is, the precursor mode ends with a large delay from the winning notification in the continuous production. In such a case, as in the case where the 2-bet game is played during the continuous production, it is conceivable to execute the preliminary production for the execution period of the bonus game to extend the continuous production, but during the bonus game It is not easy to prepare a preliminary production that fills the period, and there is a risk that the burden of production design will be greatly increased. In order to avoid such inconvenience, it is conceivable to repeatedly execute a preliminary production of a certain length during the bonus game, but this not only hinders the flow as a continuous production, but also makes the player bored. May give an impression. In this respect, in this configuration, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during the continuous production, it is distinguished from the case where the 2-bet game is performed, and the continuous production being executed is stopped and the bonus production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

If the continuous effect for the present precursor is executed and the state is changed to the second BB state, the continuous effect being executed is stopped. On the other hand, if the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor is executed and the state is changed to the second BB state, the continuous effect is being executed. It was configured to continue the continuous production of.

In the above configuration, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect, it is switched whether or not the continuous effect is continued according to the type of the execution trigger of the continuous effect. Therefore, if the continuous production is canceled due to the transition to the second BB state, the player has won the CZ mode or the like, and if the continuous production is continued, the player determines that the CZ mode or the like has not been won. Will be possible. This makes it possible not only to enjoy the development of continuous production, but also to provide a way of enjoying whether or not the continuous production is continued.

When the continuous production for this omen is stopped due to the transition to the second BB state, after the end of the second BB state, a new continuous production for this omen is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the omen mode.

In the above configuration, since the winning notification is performed by the continuous production after the second BB state, even if the continuous production is stopped due to the transition to the second BB state and the winning notification is not executed, the player is appropriately won. Can be informed. At this time, for example, as a continuous production after the second BB state, it is conceivable to execute the continuation of the canceled continuous production, but since the period of the bonus game is relatively long, the player can use the content of the continuous production before the cancellation. May not remember. Even if the continuous production is resumed in such a situation, the player cannot understand what has started, which may cause confusion. In this respect, in this configuration, since a new continuous effect is executed again, it is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to suitably suppress the confusion of the player. Further, since the continuous effect is executed according to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the end of the bonus game, a new continuous effect can be terminated in synchronization with the precursor mode. Therefore, it is possible to promptly shift to the CZ mode or the like after the winning notification is performed in the continuous production after the bonus game.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, instead of inserting a preliminary effect each time a 2-bet game is played, the number of games in which the 2-bet game is played is counted, and a continuous effect of a length corresponding to the number of games is produced. It is configured to be executed collectively at a predetermined timing. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, the scenario data table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (a). Here, a case where the present precursor scenario H (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the production scenario of the continuous production for the present precursor will be described as an example. The scenario data table shown in FIG. 70A is created in step S2209 of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49).

In the scenario data table according to the present embodiment, the effect of the present precursor preliminary scenario as the preliminary effect is set to the present precursor preliminary scenario H-battle only when the value of the continuous effect counter is 1. In the production of this precursory preliminary scenario H-battle, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the character displays 241 and 242 such as "still more" and "battle continuation" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the enemy character 212. After the display screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), an image of the warrior character 211 launching an attack is displayed on the display screen. That is, the production of the precursory preliminary scenario H-battle according to the present embodiment is not settled, and the warrior character 211 launches an attack again. The production image of FIG. 70 (c) is executed when the start lever 41 is operated, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or the first stop operation (first stop operation) to the third stop operation (final stop operation). ) Is performed, the image is switched to the production image shown in FIG. 70 (b).

<Processing for continuous production execution>
The continuous effect execution process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. This process is executed in step S2115 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect execution process of FIG. 55. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those for executing the continuous effect of FIG. 55, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503 (when the second BB start command has not been received), it is determined in step S3001 whether or not a precursor game number update command has been received as the current start command. If the command to update the number of precursor games has not been received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has not been updated in the main controller 101, the process proceeds to step S3002, and the preliminary effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 are displayed. Add 1 to the value. The preliminary effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times (the number of games) that the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated.

After the execution of step S3002 or when the affirmative judgment is made in step S3001 (when the precursor game number update command is received), the process proceeds to step S3003, and the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 1. It is determined whether or not it is. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games remaining in the continuous effect, and this step determines whether or not the game is started in a situation where the number of games remaining in the continuous effect is 1. It is to judge.

If it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is not 1, the process proceeds to step S3004, and the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is set based on the scenario data for this precursor set in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49). Perform the production of the corresponding precursor scenario. For example, as shown in FIG. 70A, in a situation where the present precursor scenario H is set as the continuous effect for the present precursor, when the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is 3, this time. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect of this precursor scenario H-2 is executed in the game. In the following step S3005, the value of the continuous effect counter is subtracted by 1, and then the process for executing the continuous effect is terminated.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3003, that is, if it is the timing to start the game in a situation where the number of games remaining in the continuous production is 1, the preliminary production process is executed in step S3006, and then the continuous production is performed. End the production execution process. In the preliminary effect processing of step S3006, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the value of the preliminary effect counter is 1 or more.

If it is determined that the value of the preliminary effect counter is 1 or more, the preliminary effect set in the scenario data table (this precursor preliminary scenario H-battle effect) is executed in step S3102. In the following step S3103, the value of the preliminary effect counter is subtracted by 1, and then the process for the preliminary effect is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S3101 (when the value of the preliminary effect counter is 0), this precursor scenario (this precursor) when the value of the continuous effect counter is 1 based on the scenario data table in step S3104. Execute the production of scenario H-4). In the following step S3105, the value of the continuous effect counter is subtracted by 1, and then the preliminary effect process ends.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous production for the present precursor in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. Here, a case will be described in which a player plays a game with a bet number of 2 in the second and fifth games from the start of continuous production, and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated in those games. Further, it is assumed that the present precursor scenario H is selected as the continuous effect for the present precursor, as shown in FIG. 70 (a).

When the number of remaining games in the omen mode reaches four, the start effect of the omen scenario H-1 is executed as a continuous effect for the omen (FIG. 73 (a)). Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the preliminary production is executed in the first embodiment, but in the present embodiment, the above The item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of this precursor scenario H-2, which is a continuation of the start effect, is executed (FIG. 73 (b)). At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is added by 1 (step S3002 in FIG. 71), and the value of the counter becomes 1. After that, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the third game from the start of the continuous production, the production (battle production) of this precursor scenario H-3 is executed (FIG. 73 (c)).

Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the fourth game from the start of the continuous production (a game in which the value of the continuous production counter is 1 at the start of the game), this precursor set in the scenario data table The production of the preliminary scenario H-battle is executed (FIGS. 73 (d) and 73 (e)). At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3103 in FIG. 72), and the value of the counter becomes 0. Since the value of the continuous effect counter is not updated when the preliminary effect is executed (flow when a negative determination is made in step S3101 of FIG. 72), the value of the counter is maintained at 1.

After that, when the player plays the game again with the number of bets set to 2 in the fifth game from the start of the continuous production, the value of the preliminary production counter is added by 1, and the value of the counter becomes 1 again. As a result, in the game, the production of this precursor preliminary scenario H-battle is executed. At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is subtracted by 1, and the value of the counter becomes 0 again.

Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the sixth game from the start of the continuous production, the production of this precursor scenario H-4 set in the scenario data is executed (FIG. 73 (f)), and the CZ Winning notification such as mode is performed. In this case, the production of this precursor scenario H-4 that notifies the winning is executed in the game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 1 (the final game in the precursor mode), and the degree of progress of the continuous production The progress with the precursor mode is synchronized.

If the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect including the preliminary effect, the continuous effect is canceled as in the first embodiment. At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is cleared to 0.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a 2-bet game is played during a continuous production, the preliminary production is not immediately executed, but the preliminary production is executed in a game after the 2-bet game.

With the above configuration, as in the first embodiment, the timing of the winning notification can be delayed in accordance with the extension of the precursor mode, and the gap between the precursor mode and the continuous effect can be eliminated. Further, in the above configuration, when the end of the precursor mode is delayed by the 2-bet game, the continuation of the continuous effect is prioritized, and the preliminary effect is executed later. In this case, if the game for executing the preliminary effect is set at a place where the division is good in the production development in the continuous production, the preliminary production is performed at the halfway part where the division is bad regardless of the timing of the 2-bet game. Can be suppressed from being inserted. Therefore, it is possible to preferably fuse the continuous effect and the preliminary effect, and to execute a good-looking continuous effect even when the length of the continuous effect is changed according to the delay of the precursor mode.

The number of 2-bet games played during the execution of the continuous production (the number of delayed games in the precursor mode) is grasped, and the preliminary production of the length of the grasped number of times (delay) is collectively executed.

For example, when the 2-bet game is executed a plurality of times during the execution of the continuous effect, the preliminary effect may be inserted many times during the continuous effect, and the progress of the continuous effect may be frequently interrupted. In this respect, in this configuration, since the preliminary effects for which the end of the precursor mode is delayed are collectively executed, it is possible to reduce the interruption of the continuous effects due to the preliminary effects. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress that the production development is difficult to understand from the player's point of view.

A preliminary effect counter is provided to grasp the number of games for which the preliminary effect is executed, and the preliminary effect counter is updated each time the preliminary effect for one game is executed. In this case, it becomes possible to appropriately carry out the preliminary production of the number of games according to the extension. Further, when a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the preliminary effect, the value of the preliminary effect counter is added. As a result, when a 2-bet game is played in the middle of the preliminary effect, the number of games to be executed in the preliminary effect can be increased. Therefore, even if the precursor mode is further extended by the 2-bet game during the preliminary production, the winning notification can be delayed accordingly, and the continuous production and the precursor mode can be synchronized.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, the continuous effect is continued, and when the 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. , The continuous production is canceled. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, the scenario data table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a). Here, a case where the present precursor scenario H (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the production scenario of the continuous production for the present precursor will be described as an example. The scenario data table shown in FIG. 74 (a) is created in step S2209 of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49).

In the scenario data table according to the present embodiment, only the precursor scenarios H-1 to H-4 are set, and the preliminary scenario is not set. That is, in the present embodiment, when the player starts the game with the number of bets set to 2 during the execution of the continuous effect (when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated), the preliminary effect is not executed.

<Processing for continuous production execution>
The continuous effect execution process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75. This process is executed in step S2115 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect execution process of FIG. 55. In FIG. 75, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those for executing the continuous effect of FIG. 55, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501 (when the continuous effect flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S3201 to determine whether or not the pseudo precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The pseudo-precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect for the pseudo-precursor (continuous effect for notifying non-winning such as CZ mode) should be executed or is being executed.

When it is determined that the pseudo precursor flag is stored, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the precursor game number update command is received as the command at the start of this time. If the command for updating the number of precursor games has not been received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has not been updated in the main control device 101, the process proceeds to step S3203 to clear (delete) the pseudo precursor flag. In the following step S3204, the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is cleared to 0. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games of the continuous effect.

After the execution of step S3204, the process proceeds to step S2508 to clear (erase) the scenario data table (effect data for continuous production) stored in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM 183. In the following step S2509, the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage areas 183a is cleared (erased), and then the continuous effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the continuous production (continuous production for pseudo precursors) being executed is canceled.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3202 (when a precursor game number update command is received) or a negative decision is made in step S3201 (when this precursor flag is stored), the start of this time is performed in step S3205. It is determined whether or not the second BB start command is received as the hour command. If the second BB start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S3206, and based on the scenario data set in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), this precursor scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter at that time or Perform the production of a pseudo precursor scenario. In the following step S3207, the value of the continuous effect counter is subtracted by 1, and then the process for executing the continuous effect is terminated.

<Production setting process during bonus>
The bonus medium effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74 (b). This process is executed in step S2112 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the bonus medium effect setting process of FIG. 57.

In the bonus middle effect setting process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the start command of this time. When the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received, the process of grasping the bonus type this time is performed in step S3302. Specifically, it is grasped whether this bonus game is based on the first BB prize or the second BB prize.

In the following step S3303, the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type grasped in step S3302 is set. After the execution of step S3303 or when a negative determination is made in step S3301, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the second BB prize is established during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor and the state shifts to the second BB state, the continuous effect is not continued.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous production for the present precursor in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. Here, a case will be described in which the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated in the game. Further, it is assumed that the present precursor scenario H is selected as the continuous effect for the present precursor, as shown in FIG. 74 (a).

When the number of remaining games in the omen mode reaches four, the start effect of the omen scenario H-1 is executed as a continuous effect for the omen (FIG. 76 (a)). Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the preliminary production is executed in the first embodiment, but in the present embodiment, the above The item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of this precursor scenario H-2, which is a continuation of the start effect, is executed.

After that, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the third and fourth games from the start of the continuous production, the production (battle production) of the precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 is executed (battle production). FIG. 76 (b)), the winning of the CZ mode and the like is notified. However, since the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has not been updated in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is at the end of the fourth game (the game that notified the winning). It is 1.

In such a state, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the fifth game from the start of the continuous production, the standby production is executed in order to make up for the remaining number of games in the precursor mode that has become surplus. To. In the present embodiment, a winning notification effect such as a CZ mode is executed as a standby effect. FIG. 76 shows a case where the AT winning notification effect (FIG. 66 (a)) is executed as the winning notification effect (FIG. 76 (c)). It should be noted that various winning commands (CZ winning command, AT winning command, AT addition) transmitted from the main control device 101 determine whether to execute the winning notification effect corresponding to the addition of the number of games in the CZ mode, AT mode, or AT mode. The winning type is determined based on the command), and the selection is made based on the result.

After that, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the sixth game from the start of the continuous production, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode at that time is 0, so the CZ is started from the main control device 101. A command, a first AT winning notification command, a second AT winning notification command, and the like are transmitted (FIGS. 41 and 42). The display control device 81 continues the above-mentioned winning notification effect in order to perform winning notification based on those commands (FIG. 76 (d)).

Next, the flow of continuous production for pseudo precursors in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Here, a case where the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous production will be described as an example. Further, it is assumed that the pseudo omen scenario F (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) of FIG. 53 is selected as the continuous production for the pseudo omen.

When the value of the effect standby counter (FIG. 54) becomes 0, the start effect of the pseudo precursor scenario F-1 is executed as a continuous effect for the pseudo precursor (FIG. 77 (a)). After that, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the production of the pseudo precursor scenario F-2 set in the scenario data table as the preparation production (item acquisition production) is performed. It is executed (Fig. 77 (b)). After that, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous production, the continuous production for the pseudo precursor is stopped, and a normal production different from the normal production is executed. The cancellation of the continuous production at this time is executed at the game start timing (the timing when the start lever 41 is operated with the number of bets set to 2) in the third game.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for this precursor, the continuous effect being executed is continued, while the 2-bet game is executed during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. It was configured to cancel the continuous production inside.

In the above configuration, when a two-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect, it is switched whether or not the continuous effect is continued according to the type of the execution trigger of the continuous effect. Therefore, even if the player plays the 2-bet game, the continuous production is not canceled, and if the continuous production is continued as it is, the CZ mode or the like is won, and if the continuous production is canceled, the CZ mode or the like is not won. It becomes possible to determine that. This makes it possible not only to enjoy the development of continuous production, but also to provide a way of enjoying whether or not the continuous production is continued.

If the precursor mode is extended in units of one game due to the 2-bet game, the continuous production during execution (continuous production for this precursor) is continued, and the precursor mode is extended over multiple games by shifting to the second BB state. If this is the case, the continuous production during execution is canceled. That is, the configuration is such that continuous production is switched or canceled depending on the length of the period during which the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated.

In this configuration, when the precursor mode is extended for a short extension period during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuation of the continuous effect is prioritized, assuming that the deviation of the end of the precursor mode from the execution timing of the winning notification is within the allowable range. .. On the other hand, if the precursor mode is extended for a long extension period during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production is stopped because the above deviation cannot be ignored, and the winning notification is forcibly terminated so as not to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to expand the chances that the continuous production is continued, and to prevent the production contradiction from occurring even if the period of not shifting to the CZ mode or the like continues after the production is completed. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the continuous effect is always continued or the continuous effect is always stopped, it is possible to more appropriately deal with the event that the precursor mode is extended during the execution of the continuous effect.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a BB prize is established during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, the continuous effect being executed is switched to the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the understanding of the characteristic configuration, the configurations relating to the continuous production for the present precursor and the continuous production for the pseudo precursor are as follows. When the 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, the preliminary effect is not executed as in the third embodiment. Further, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, the continuous effect is prioritized over the bonus effect, and the final game of the continuous effect ends, as in the first embodiment. The continuous production is continued until it is done.

<Production setting process during bonus>
The effect setting process during the bonus according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. This process is executed in step S2112 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the bonus medium effect setting process of FIG. 57. In FIG. 78, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the bonus middle effect setting process of FIG. 57, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2702 (when a first BB start command or a second BB command is received), it is determined in step S3301 whether or not the precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. .. This precursor flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the precursor mode is being executed.

If it is determined that the precursor flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3302, and it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The continuous effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect should be executed and that the continuous effect is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301 and further affirmative determination is made in step S3301, it means that the state has shifted to the first BB state or the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect of performing the winning notification such as the CZ mode. In this case, in step S3303, the type of continuous effect being executed is grasped. For example, as shown in the scenario data table of FIG. 79 (a), when the continuous production of this precursor scenario H (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is being executed, the type of the continuous production is Understand this precursor scenario H. It should be noted that this scenario data table is created in step S2209 of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49) and stored in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM 183.

In the following step S3304, the number of remaining games of the continuous effect is grasped based on the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. Next, in step S3305, a pseudo precursor effect table (FIG. 53) stored in various table storage areas of ROM 182 is acquired.

After that, in step S3306, the effect data for the pseudo precursor corresponding to the continuation of the continuous effect is set in the scenario data table. In the processing of this step, first, the progress degree of the continuous production being executed is grasped based on the type of the continuous production grasped in the step S3303 and the number of remaining games of the continuous continuous production grasped in the step S3304. For example, in the situation where the present precursor scenario H is grasped and the number of remaining games of the continuous effect is 2, it is grasped that the preparation effect (item acquisition effect) of the present precursor scenario H-2 has been advanced. Then, based on the pseudo-precursor effect table, information on the pseudo-precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 (battle effect for pseudo-precursor) is set in the scenario data table as the effect (final effect) following the above-mentioned preparatory effect. To do. As shown in FIG. 79B, the information on the effects of the pseudo precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 is set so that the values of the continuous effect counters correspond to 2 and 1, respectively. As a result, the scenario data table is changed so that the effects of the pseudo precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 are executed as the effects of the third and fourth games of the continuous effect.

In step S3307, the value of the continuous effect counter managed during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor is taken over as the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. It should be noted that this step is described for convenience of explanation, and the processing is merely that the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is not cleared. After that, in step S3308, the pseudo precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. As a result, both the main precursor flag and the pseudo precursor flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. After the execution of step S3308, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301 (when the precursor mode is not being executed) or a negative determination is made in step S3302 (when continuous production is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S2703 to grasp the current bonus type. Perform processing. In the following step S2704, the bonus effect corresponding to the grasped bonus type is set, and then the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated.

<Processing for continuous production execution>
The continuous effect execution process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80 (a). This process is executed in step S2115 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect execution process of FIG. 55.

In the continuous effect execution process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not stored, the process for executing this continuous effect is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag is stored, that is, when the continuous effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3302, and the value of the continuous effect counter is set based on the scenario data set at that time. Execute the production of the corresponding precursor scenario or pseudo precursor scenario. For example, when the value of the effect counter becomes 1, the scenario data table is returned to the state shown in FIG. 79 (a) without being rewritten in step S3306 of the effect setting process during bonus (FIG. 78). In some cases, the effect of the precursor scenario H-4 is controlled to be executed, and the effect image in which the warrior character 211 wins is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. On the other hand, when the scenario data table is changed to the state shown in FIG. 79 (b) in step S3306, it is controlled so that the effect of the pseudo omen scenario H-4 is executed, and the warrior character 211 is displayed on the display screen. The production image that is defeated is displayed. After the execution of step S3402, the value of the continuous effect counter is subtracted by 1 in step S3403, and then the process for executing this continuous effect is terminated.

<Production setting process when all stops>
The flow of the all-stop effect setting process according to the present embodiment is the same as that of the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 56) according to the first embodiment, but the start of the second BB state is a trigger. The processing related to the case where the continuous effect changed to the pseudo precursor scenario is completed will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80 (b).

When a negative determination is made in step S2611 (when the precursor end command has not been received), it is determined in step S2614 whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter is 0, that is, whether or not the continuous effect has ended. .. When it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is 0 (when the continuous effect is completed), the process proceeds to step S2615, and the pseudo precursor flags stored in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared (erased). As described above, when the second BB state is started during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor and the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor is switched, the present precursor flag and the pseudo precursor flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. And will be stored. By executing the process of clearing the pseudo precursor flag in this step, only the present precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a.

In step S2616, the continuous effect flags stored in the various flag storage areas 183a are cleared (erased), and in the following step S2617, it is determined whether or not the second BB state is being executed. If it is determined that the second BB state is being executed, the pseudo precursor end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the process proceeds to step S2621 (other all-stop effect setting processes). ..

When the pseudo precursor end flag is set in this way, in the bonus middle effect setting process of FIG. 78, a positive determination is made in the determination process of step S2706 (determination process of whether or not the pseudo precursor end flag is stored). .. Then, in step S2707, the pseudo precursor end flag is cleared (erased), and the process proceeds to step S2703. In step S2703, a process of grasping the current bonus type is performed, and in the following step S2704, a bonus effect corresponding to the grasped bonus type is set. That is, when the continuous effect being executed is changed to the scenario for pseudo precursors with the start of the second BB state as a trigger, the bonus effect is executed after the continuous effect is completed.

<Continuous production setting process>
The flow of the continuous effect setting process according to the present embodiment is the same as the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49) according to the first embodiment, but the first is during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor. The processing related to the case where the 2BB state is started and then the second BB state is finished will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80 (c).

In the continuous effect setting process, first, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received, that is, whether or not the BB state has ended. If it is determined that the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received (when the BB state has ended), the process proceeds to step S2215, and whether or not the precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. To judge. As described above, when the continuous effect (continuous effect changed to the pseudo scenario) ends in the middle of the second BB state, only the pseudo precursor flag is set in step S2615 of the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 80 (b)). Is cleared, and the state in which the precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a is maintained. In this case, an affirmative judgment is made in this step.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2215, a process of acquiring the present precursor effect table from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is executed in step S2207, and then the processes of steps S2208 and subsequent steps are executed. In this case, in step S2210, 0 is set as the value of the effect standby counter (if it is already 0, it is left as it is), and the continuous effect is set to start immediately. As a result, with the end of the second BB state, a new continuous effect is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous production for the present precursor in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. Here, a case where the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production and the second BB prize is established in that game will be described as an example. Further, it is assumed that the present precursor scenario H is selected as the continuous effect for the present precursor, as shown in FIG. 79 (a).

When the number of remaining games in the omen mode reaches four, the start effect of the omen scenario H-1 is executed as a continuous effect for the omen (FIG. 81 (a)). Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated, but in the present embodiment, the above start production is continued. The item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of this precursory scenario H-2 is executed.

In the second game, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 at the timing when the symbol combination (FIG. 13 (f)) corresponding to the second BB is stopped, the second BB prize is established, and then the second BB prize is established. The bonus game corresponding to the second BB is started from the game of. When the player operates the start lever 41 with the number of bets set to 3 in the third game from the start of the continuous production (starting game of the bonus game), the game is started, and the setting data storage area for the production of the RAM 183 is accompanied by the operation. In the scenario data table set in 183c, the effects of the third and subsequent games of the continuous effect are changed to the effects of the pseudo precursor scenario (FIG. 79 (b)). That is, although the bonus game is started by operating the start lever 41, the bonus effect is not executed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the battle effect of the pseudo precursor scenario H-3 as a continuation of the continuous effect is executed. Will be done.

Further, in the above case, the precursor mode flag stored in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101 at the start of the bonus game is not cleared and is maintained as it is. Further, also in the display control device 81, the precursor flag stored in the RAM 183 is maintained as it is without being cleared. That is, the information indicating that the precursor mode is in progress is retained internally.

Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the fourth game (the second game of the bonus game) from the start of the continuous production, the pseudo precursor scenario H-4 set in the changed scenario data table The defeat effect of (Fig. 81 (b)) is executed. As a result, the continuous production ends with the notification of non-winning being performed in the CZ mode or the like. After that, when the player plays the next game with the number of bets set to 3, a bonus effect is executed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. The bonus effect is continued until the timing t1 at which the bonus game of the second BB ends.

When the bonus game ends at timing t1 and the player plays the next game with the number of bets set to 3, the display control device 81 displays the number of remaining games in the precursor mode at that time (3 games in the example of FIG. 81). A continuous effect (continuous effect for this precursor) that can be executed within the range of is drawn, and a new system data table is created (NO, step S2215, and step S2207 in step S2201 of FIG. 80 (a). reference). In this case, since the value of the effect standby counter is set to 0, the continuous effect set in the new system data table is executed in that game (next game after the end of the bonus game). That is, when the second BB state ends, a new continuous effect is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

For example, if this precursor scenario A (continuous production of three games in which the girl character 201 appears) is selected as a new continuous production, the player sets the number of bets to 3 in the next game after the second BB state ends. If so, the production of this precursor scenario A-1 is executed (FIG. 81 (c)). Then, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the second and third games from the start of the new continuous production, the final of the precursor scenarios A-2 and A-3 set in the scenario data. The effect (transformation effect) is executed (FIG. 81 (d)). As a result, winning notification such as CZ mode is performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for this precursor, the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed so that the notification is performed.

When shifting to the bonus game of the second BB, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated in the entire bonus game, so that the precursor mode is greatly extended. In this case, for example, if the continuous production is continued as it is, the player's trust in the production may lead to a situation in which the mode does not shift to the CZ mode or the like for a long period of time even though the winning notification is performed in the production. There is a concern that it will decrease. Therefore, the continuous production cannot be continued. In this regard, in this configuration, since the production mode of the continuous production is changed so that the disengagement notification is performed, the player can be made to think that the disengagement is performed, and after the end of the continuous production, the period of not shifting to the CZ mode or the like continues. However, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of production contradiction. Therefore, even if the precursor mode is extended in the middle of the continuous production, the continuous production can be continued.

When the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, the remaining continuous effect is replaced with the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor.

This continuous production for pseudo-precursor (continuous production for miss notification) is changed because it was originally configured as a continuous production like the continuous production for this precursor (continuous production for winning notification). By utilizing the continuous production for pseudo precursors as the subsequent continuous production, it is possible to satisfactorily connect the continuous production before the change and the continuous production after the change. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the production mode of the continuous production has been changed. As a result, it becomes easy for the player to assume that the player is out of position, and it is possible to more preferably ensure consistency with the fact that there is a period during which the player does not shift to the CZ mode or the like after the production is completed. Moreover, since a part of the continuous effect for pseudo precursors is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect for change. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated effect, and it is also possible to save the capacity of the ROM for storing the effect data.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the continuous effect for the pseudo omen corresponding to the type of the continuous effect for the main omen that was executed before the transition to the second BB state is used. In this case, it is difficult to understand that the continuous effect for the pseudo omen is switched to in the middle of the continuous effect for the present omen, and it is possible to preferably suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

Furthermore, if the player shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for this precursor, the player grasps the progress of the continuous effect and replaces it with the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor corresponding to the continuation. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the boundary between before and after the change. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to understand that the continuous production for the pseudo-precursor is switched to in the middle of the continuous production for the main precursor, and it becomes possible to make the person think that the continuous production is suitable for the pseudo-precursor.

When the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed for the out-of-order notification due to the transition to the second BB state, the continuous effect of performing the winning notification is executed after the end of the second BB state.

In the configuration in which the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed for the out-of-order notification by the transition to the second BB state, the winning notification that should have been originally performed is canceled. Therefore, if the update of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is resumed after the second BB state, the player may shift to the CZ mode or the like without being notified of the winning, which may confuse the player. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed for the out-of-order notification, the winning notification can be performed in the continuous effect executed after the second BB state. As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the winning, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, the continuous effect is executed with the number of remaining games in the precursor mode. As a result, the continuous production after the bonus game can be ended in synchronization with the end of the precursor mode. Therefore, it is possible to promptly shift to the CZ mode or the like after the winning notification is performed in the continuous production after the bonus game.

When the continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, a new continuous effect is executed again. In this case, the continuous effect executed at the time of transition to the second BB state (continuous effect executed at the time of change) and the continuous effect after the second BB state are clearly distinguished, and the player confuses both. It is possible to preferably suppress confusion.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, after the end of the bonus game, a new continuous production is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, but if the number of remaining games is small, the number of games is insufficient and a new continuous production is performed. Can be difficult to carry out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a new continuous production is started before the end of the bonus game. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Production setting process during bonus>
The bonus medium effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2112 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the bonus middle effect setting process of FIG. 78. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the bonus middle effect setting process of FIG. 78, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, that is, if the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the pseudo precursor end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. To do. If it is determined that the pseudo precursor end flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4001 to determine whether or not the number of remaining games in the precursor mode at that time is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games.

The predetermined number of games in this step can be, for example, the number obtained by subtracting one game from the number of games required to execute the continuous production, and can be two games in the present embodiment. In the following, the description will proceed with the predetermined number of games as two games. Further, since the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated during the execution of the first BB state or the second BB state (FIG. 39), the remaining number of games in the precursor mode when executing this step is substantially the end of the bonus game. It is the number of remaining games in the precursor mode when you do.

If the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games (2 games), the process proceeds to step S4002, and it is determined whether or not this game is the final game of the bonus game. Judgment as to whether or not it is the final game is performed when the winning combination (small combination) in this game is specified based on the winning result command transmitted from the main control device 101 and the winning combination is established. This is done by determining whether or not the number of medals paid out is equal to or greater than the remaining number of medals up to the maximum number of medals paid out (46) in the bonus game. For example, if the winning combination in this game is a common bell (the number of medals paid out at the time of winning is 13) and the remaining number up to the maximum number of medals paid out is 13 or less, this game is a bonus game. Judged as the final game of.

If it is determined that the game is the final game of the bonus game, in step S4003, 1 is added to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode grasped in step S4002, and this is grasped as the number of executed games of continuous production. Next, in step S4004, the effect table for this precursor is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of ROM 182, and then, in step S4005, a lottery process for continuous effect is executed. In step S4005, continuous production that can be executed within the range of the number of execution games grasped in step S4003 is executed. For example, when the number of executed games grasped in step S4003 is 3, among the various scenarios set in the effect table for the precursor in FIG. 50, the precursor scenario A or the precursor scenario B that can be executed in 3 games is selected. It will be decided by lottery.

After the execution of step S4005, in step S4006, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created, and in the following step S4007, a continuous effect counter provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is used. Set the value. The continuous effect counter is for counting the number of executed games or the number of remaining games of the continuous effect. For example, when the number of executed games grasped in step S4003 is 3, 3 is set as the value of the continuous effect counter. Will be done. Further, in step S4007, the value of the effect standby counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is set to 0 (if it is already 0, the value is left as it is), and the continuous effect is set to start immediately. The effect standby counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of standby games until the start of continuous effect.

By the processes of steps S4002 to S4007, the setting process for executing the continuous effect is executed at the start of the final game of the bonus game. After the execution of step S4007, in step S4008, the pre-end start flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a. The pre-end start flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous production has started before the end of the bonus game.

After the execution of step S4008, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated. If a negative determination is made in either step S4001 or step S4002 (when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not 2 games or less, or when this game is not the final game of the bonus game), step S4003 or later is performed. The effect setting process during this bonus is terminated without executing the process.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83 (a). This process is executed in step S2113 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect setting process of FIG. 49. In FIG. 83A, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in the continuous effect setting process of FIG. 49, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the continuous continuous setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received, that is, whether or not the BB state has ended. If it is determined that the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received (when the BB state has ended), the process proceeds to step S2215, and whether or not the precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. To judge.

When it is determined that the precursor flag is stored, that is, when the mode shifts to the precursor mode after the end of the bonus game, the process proceeds to step S4101, and whether or not the pre-end start flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. Is determined. If it is determined that the pre-end start flag is not stored, that is, if the continuous effect (continuous effect for this omen) is not started before the end of the bonus game, various table storage areas of ROM 182 are stored in step S2207. The process of acquiring the effect table for this precursor is executed from 182a, and then the processes of steps S2208 and subsequent steps are executed. That is, with the end of the second BB state, a new continuous effect is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4101 (when the pre-end start flag is not stored), the continuous effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2207. That is, if the continuous effect is started before the end of the bonus game, the continuous effect setting process at the end of the bonus game is not executed.

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of all stops according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83 (b). This process is executed in step S1910 of the effect setting process (FIG. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG. 56. Note that, in FIG. 83 (b), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in the all-stop effect setting process of FIG. 56, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step S2611 (when the precursor end command is received), that is, when the precursor mode is terminated, the book stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 in steps S2612 and S2613. Clear (erase) the precursor flag and the continuous effect flag. In the following step S4201, it is determined whether or not the pre-end start flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a, and if it is determined that the pre-end start flag is stored, the pre-end start flag is cleared in step S4202. to erase. After the execution of step S4202 or when a negative determination is made in step S4201 (when the pre-end start flag is not stored), the other stop-time effect setting process of step S2621 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2614 (when the value of the continuous effect counter is not 0), whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received as the current stop all command in step S2619. Is determined. If it is determined that these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S4203, and it is determined whether or not the pre-end start flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. If it is determined that the pre-end start flag is not stored (when the continuous effect is not started before the end of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S2620 to set the bonus end effect. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-end start flag is stored (when the continuous effect is started before the end of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S26212 without executing the process of step S2620. That is, if the continuous effect is started before the end of the bonus game, the bonus end effect is not executed.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous production for the present precursor in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. Here, a case where the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous production and the second BB prize is established in that game will be described as an example. Further, as the continuous production for the present precursor, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), it is assumed that the present precursor scenario H (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected.

Further, here, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect, it is changed to the effect of the pseudo precursor scenario and the continuous effect is continuously executed as in the fourth embodiment. To do. Since the flow of continuous production in this case is as described in the fourth embodiment, the description will be omitted or simplified as appropriate.

When the number of remaining games in the omen mode reaches 4, the start effect of the omen scenario H-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the omen (Fig. 84 (a)), and then the second game from the start of the continuous effect. When the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3, the item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of this precursor scenario H-2 is executed.

Then, in the game of the third game from the start of the continuous production, the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 in the game of the third game from the start of the continuous production, and the symbol combination corresponding to 2BB in the game (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13). When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when f)) is stopped, the second BB prize is established, and the bonus game corresponding to the second BB is started from the next game. Because the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated in the game in which the second BB prize is established (the game in which the number of bets is set to 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous production) and the start game in the bonus game corresponding to the second BB. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the bonus game is started in a state where the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is two games.

In the present embodiment, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated at the start of the game. Therefore, in the description in FIG. 84, the bonus game is started with the number of remaining games in the precursor mode being 3. However, the actual number of remaining games is two. This is a bonus game when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 4 games (start of continuous production) and the 3-bet game is played twice (the number of remaining games in continuous production is 2 games). Is consistent with the start of.

After that, when the final game of the bonus game is reached at timing t1, the display control device 81 is within the range of the number of games (3 games in the example of FIG. 84) obtained by adding 1 game to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode at that time. A feasible continuous effect (continuous effect for this precursor) is drawn, and a new system data table is created (YES in step S4001 in FIG. 82, YES in step S4002, steps S4003 to S4008). In this case, since the value of the effect standby counter is set to 0, the continuous effect set in the new system data table is executed in that game (the final game of the bonus game). That is, a new continuous production is started prior to the end of the second BB state.

For example, if this precursor scenario A (continuous production of three games in which the girl character 201 appears) is selected as a new continuous production, the production of this precursor scenario A-1 is executed in the final game of the bonus game ( FIG. 84 (c). Then, when the bonus game ends at the timing t2 and the player plays the next game with the number of bets set to 3, the effect of the precursor scenario A-2 set in the scenario data is executed. After that, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 3 in the third game from the start of the new continuous production, the production of this precursor scenario A-3 is executed, and the winning notification such as the CZ mode is performed ( FIG. 84 (d)).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the continuous effect is executed using the remaining precursor modes after the second BB state, the continuous effect is started before the end of the second BB state.

Depending on the timing of transition to the second BB state, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the end of the second BB state may be small. In this case, it may be difficult to execute the continuous production due to the shortage of the number of games. In addition, although it is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect when the number of remaining games is small, there is a concern that the processing load required for switching may increase and the burden at the time of designing due to the creation of the dedicated effect may increase. In this respect, in this configuration, since the continuous production is started prior to the end of the second BB state, it is possible to secure a larger number of games as the number of execution games of the continuous production than the actual number of remaining games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous production from being properly executed due to the shortage of the number of games, the increase in the processing load due to the dedicated production, and the increase in the burden at the time of design, and the remaining precursor mode after the second BB state. It becomes possible to preferably carry out continuous production using.

With reference to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the end of the second BB state, when the number of remaining games is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the continuous effect is started before the end of the second BB state.

For example, if the continuous production is uniformly started before the end of the second BB state, there is a concern that the continuous production will be unnecessarily lengthened, giving the player a feeling of delay. In this respect, in this configuration, the continuous production is started early only when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform continuous production using the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the second BB state, while suppressing the period of continuous production from becoming unnecessarily long.

The number of remaining payouts of the bonus game of the second BB is grasped, the number of remaining games is specified from the result, and when the number of remaining games becomes a predetermined number or less, continuous production is started.

When the continuous production is started before the end of the bonus game, for example, if the start timing of the continuous production is too early, the continuous production ends earlier than the remaining precursor modes after the bonus game elapse, or vice versa. If the start timing of the continuous production is too late, the continuous production may exceed the precursor mode. In this regard, in this configuration, the number of remaining games is specified (estimated) with reference to the number of remaining payouts for each bonus game, and the start timing of continuous production is determined based on the result. As a result, continuous production can be started at an appropriate timing in relation to the number of remaining games in the second BB state, and continuous production suitable for both the number of remaining games in the second BB state and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is preferable. It will be possible to carry out.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the continuous production is started in the final game of the bonus game. In the case of a bonus game that ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out reaches the maximum number of payouts, the number of games to be executed is not uniquely determined, but if the winning role is won in the bonus game, that If the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination is equal to or greater than the number of remaining payouts up to the maximum number of payouts, the game can be identified as the final game of the bonus game. That is, although the reliability of the estimation of the remaining 2 games and 3 games may be low, the final game can be accurately specified. Therefore, if the continuous production is started in the final game of the bonus game, the continuous production can be executed in a state where one game is surely added to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the number of games for which continuous production is executed, but also to preferably synchronize the continuous production with the precursor mode.

<Sixth Embodiment>
As already explained, in the advantageous section, either the end condition of the advantageous section game number AG reaching the upper limit number of games (1500 games) or the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY reaching the upper limit increase number (2400 games) is satisfied. It ends by doing. Then, in the present embodiment, the ending effect is performed according to the end timing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of those conditions, and the execution mode of the ending effect is devised. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. 47. In FIG. 85, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 47, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1905 (when the newly received command is a start command), the start effect setting process is executed in step S1906. Next, in step S4301, the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect is executed, and in the following step S4302, the ending effect execution process for executing the set ending effect is executed. After the execution of step S4302 or when a negative determination is made in step S1905 (when the newly received command is not the start command), the process proceeds to step S1907, and it is determined whether or not the newly received command is each stop operation command. judge.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process of step S4301 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86 (a).

In the ending effect setting process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. These ending flags are for the CPU 181 to grasp that the ending effect is being executed.

If it is determined that either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is stored, it is considered that the ending effect has already been set, and the present ending effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4402, and it is determined whether or not the interval is advantageous.

If it is determined that the player is in the advantageous section, in step S4403, whether or not the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games) based on the number of remaining games such as AT mode. Is determined. In this step, for example, the total number of advantageous section games (number of advantageous section digestion games), the number of remaining games in AT mode, the number of remaining games in CZ mode, and the number of remaining games in precursor mode is grasped, and the total is grasped. It is determined whether or not the grasping result is equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section or more than the upper limit number of games. As a result, if the total is equal to or greater than the maximum number of games in the advantageous section or greater than the maximum number of games, it is determined that the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of games with the current number of remaining games, and conversely, the above total is advantageous. If it is less than the maximum number of games in the section or less than or equal to the maximum number of games, it is determined that the advantageous section does not reach the maximum number of games with the current number of remaining games. For example, in a situation where the number of digested games in the advantageous section is 1450 and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 50 or more, if the player is playing the AT mode as it is, the upper limit of the advantageous section is before the end of the AT mode. If it is expected that the number of games will be reached, it is determined that the current number of remaining games will reach the maximum number of games in the advantageous section.

In the above determination, it is necessary for the display control device 81 to be able to grasp the number of advantageous section games, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc., but in this regard, the number of advantageous section games, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. By transmitting various commands indicating the information of the above from the main control device 101 at the start and end of each game and analyzing those commands in the display control device 81, the display control device 81 can determine the number of advantageous section games and the AT mode. The configuration may be such that information such as the number of remaining games is acquired.

Further, the determination in step S4403 may be performed on the main control device 101 side, and the result may be notified to the display control device 81. For example, the main control device 101 determines whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached within the range of the number of remaining games such as AT mode, and if it is determined that the number of games is reached, a command indicating that fact is displayed and controlled. It is configured to output to the device 81.

If, as a result of the determination process in step S4403, it is determined that the advantageous section does not reach the upper limit number of games with the current number of remaining games, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games such as AT mode.

Specifically, first, the amount of medal increase / decrease expected when the remaining AT mode is exhausted by using the number of remaining games in AT mode and the expected net increase number or average increase number per game in AT mode ( Calculate the expected increase / decrease in the number of sheets in the future). After that, the calculated expected increase / decrease number and the actual medal increase / decrease number since the start of the advantageous section (current actual increase / decrease number) are added, and the addition result (current actual increase / decrease number and future expected increase / decrease number) (Sum) is greater than or equal to the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section or greater than the upper limit increase number. As a result, if the above addition result is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section or larger than the upper limit increase number, it is determined that the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number with the current number of remaining games, and conversely, the above total is If it is less than or less than the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section does not reach the upper limit increase number with the current number of remaining games. For example, the number of remaining games in AT mode is 30 (the expected net increase in the number of games per game in AT mode is plus about 8.04, and the expected increase in the number of remaining games is about 240). When the number of advantageous section increase / decrease at the time is 2160 or more, and if the player is playing the AT mode as it is, it is expected that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section will be reached before the end of the AT mode. , It is judged that the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section.

If it is determined that the current number of remaining games does not reach the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section, the ending effect setting process is terminated as the ending effect is not set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached, or if it is determined affirmatively in step S4403 (when it is determined that the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is reached with the current remaining number of games), the process proceeds to step S4405. It is determined whether or not the game start timing of this time is the start timing of the ending effect. This determination is made, for example, by comparing the number of games that execute the ending effect (for example, 10 games) with the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and when both values match, the start timing of the ending effect (start game). Is determined to be.

In the above case, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends by reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is the expected net increase number or average of the remaining number of games up to the upper limit increase number per game in AT mode. Derived by dividing by the increased number of sheets. In this case, the part after the decimal point of the division result may be truncated or rounded up. For example, when the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number is 150, 18 games or 19 games are grasped as the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. The determination process in step S4404 may be performed on the main control device 101 side as in the case of step S4403, and the result may be notified to the display control device 81.

If it is determined in step S4405 that the current game start timing is not the start timing of the ending effect, the ending effect setting process is terminated as if the ending effect is not set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game start timing this time is the start timing of the ending effect, the ending effect is set in step S4406.

The ending effect is an effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached, and is a series of effects performed over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games). It is composed. In the ending effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes an animation effect in which a predetermined character or the like appears. The animation effect at that time is set to, for example, repeat playback of a 5-minute animation movie. Further, in the final game of the ending effect, as a suggestion to the player of the ending effect and the end of the advantageous section, for example, an end notification in which characters such as "Congratulations" and "END" are displayed is performed.

In the following step S4407, it is determined whether or not the end trigger of the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games. When the advantageous section ends when the maximum number of games is reached, the first ending flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S4408. The first ending flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the maximum number of games is reached should be started or that the effect is being executed. ..

On the other hand, when the advantageous section does not end when the maximum number of games is reached, that is, when the advantageous section ends when the maximum number of games is reached, the second ending in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S4409. Set (store) the flag. The second ending flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number should be started or that the effect is being executed. .. The first ending effect and the second ending effect may have the same content or may have different contents.

After the execution of step S4408 or step S4409, the ending effect setting process ends.

<Processing for executing ending effect>
The processing for executing the ending effect in step S4302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86 (b).

In the ending effect execution process, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the first ending flag or the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If any of these flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S4502, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the ending effect is executed in this game. In this step, the above control is executed based on the setting result of step S4406 of FIG. 86 (a). At that time, if the ending effect has already been executed, it is controlled so that the ending effect will continue to be performed in this game, and if it is the situation before execution, the ending effect will be started from this game. Control.

After the execution of step S4502 or when a negative determination is made in step S4501 (when neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag is stored), the processing for executing the ending effect is terminated.

<Production setting process during bonus>
The effect setting process during the bonus according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the bonus middle effect setting process of FIG. 57. In FIG. 87, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the bonus middle effect setting process of FIG. 57, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2702 (when the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the start command this time), the process proceeds to step S4601 and the first ending flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. Determine if it is stored. If it is determined that the first ending flag is not stored, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a.

When it is determined that the second ending flag is stored, that is, when the second ending flag is stored in the situation where the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the start command this time, the second ending flag is stored. The first BB prize or the second BB prize is established during the execution of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number, and the bonus game of the winning side in each of those BB states is started. Means that. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4603 to execute the process of clearing (erasing) the second ending flag. As a result, the second ending effect being executed is canceled. That is, when the second ending flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S4501 of the ending effect execution process (FIG. 86 (b)) executed thereafter, so that the continuation of the second ending effect is executed. As a result, the second ending effect is canceled.

After the execution of step S4603, the process of grasping the current bonus type is performed in step S2703, and the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type is set in the subsequent step S2704. That is, the setting process for starting the bonus effect is executed. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S4602 (when the second ending flag is not stored), that is, in a situation where neither the first ending effect nor the second ending effect is being executed, the first BB state or the second BB state. Also when the bonus game of is started, the processes of steps S2703 and S2704 are executed, and the setting process for starting the bonus effect is executed.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S4601 (the first ending flag is stored), that is, the first ending flag is stored in the situation where the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the start command this time. If this is the case, the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established during the execution of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the maximum number of games is reached, and the winning side among those BB states. Means that the bonus game of is started. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2705 without executing the processes of step S2703 and step S2704. That is, if the bonus game of the first BB or the second BB is started during the execution of the first ending effect, the first ending effect is continued and the bonus effect is not started.

In step S2705, it is determined whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed. If any of the BB states is being executed, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the pseudo precursor end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. If it is determined that the pseudo precursor end flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4604, and it is determined whether or not the BB middle end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. The BB middle end flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the first ending effect has ended during the execution of the first BB state or the second BB state.

If it is determined that the BB middle end flag is not stored, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the BB middle end flag is stored, the process of clearing (erasing) the BB middle end flag is executed in step S4605, and then the process proceeds to step S2703. That is, if the first ending effect is continued even after the transition to the bonus game, the bonus effect is controlled to start after the ending effect is completed.

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of total stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG. 56.

If a negative determination is made in step S2619 (when the first BB end command or the second BB end command has not been received as the current stop command), the process proceeds to step S4701 and the first ending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. Determines if is stored. When the first ending flag is stored, that is, when the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the maximum number of games is reached is being executed, the current game is played in step S4702. It is determined whether or not the game should end the first ending effect. In this step, the above determination is made with reference to whether or not the current game is the end game of the advantageous section (in other words, whether or not the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 0), and the current game is In the case of the end game of the advantageous section, it is grasped that this game is the game in which the first ending effect should be ended.

If it is determined that the current game is a game for which the ending effect should be ended, a process of clearing (erasing) the first ending flag is executed in step S4703. As a result, the ending effect is completed. That is, if the first ending flag is cleared at the end of the game in which the first ending effect should be ended, step S4501 of the ending effect execution process (FIG. 86 (b)) executed at the start of the next game. Will be judged as negative. In this case, since the first ending effect is not executed in the game, the first ending effect ends as a result.

After the execution of step S4703, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed. If it is determined that the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4705, and the BB middle end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a. After the execution of step S4705 or when a negative determination is made in step S4704 (when neither the first BB state nor the second BB state is being executed), the process proceeds to step S2621 and other all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4702 (if it is determined that this game is not a game that should end the first ending effect), it is assumed that the first ending effect being executed is continued, and the processes of steps S4703 to S4705 are performed. Proceed to step S2621 without executing.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701 (when the first ending flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S4706 to determine whether or not the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the second ending flag is stored, that is, when the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the upper limit increase number is reached is being executed, the current game is played in step S4707. It is determined whether or not the game should end the second ending effect. The specific processing of the determination is the same as in step S4702.

If it is determined that the current game is a game in which the second ending effect should be ended, a process of clearing (erasing) the second ending flag is executed in step S4708. As a result, the second ending effect is completed. After the execution of step S4708 or when a negative determination is made in step S4707 (when it is determined that this game is not a game in which the second ending effect should be ended), the process proceeds to step S2621 and other all-stop effect setting processes are performed. Execute.

<Flow of ending production>
Next, the flow of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. 89. Here, the case where the second BB prize is established in the middle of the ending effect (the case of shifting to the second BB state) will be described as an example.

First, a case where the second BB prize is established in the middle of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the maximum number of games is reached will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a).

At the timing t1 in the advantageous section, when the start timing of the first ending effect is reached, the first ending effect is started. After that, in the game in which the first ending effect is being executed, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 and the second BB prize is established in that game, the bonus game in the second BB state starts from the next game. (Timing t2).

Here, in the present embodiment, if the game shifts to the bonus game in the middle of the advantageous section, the advantageous section does not end, and during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the bonus game is in progress, the advantageous section It is configured to count the number of digested games (advantageous section game number AG) (see FIG. 45). Therefore, even if the game shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the first ending effect, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section does not change, and the number of remaining games remains the same as when the game does not shift to the second BB state. Based on this point, in the present embodiment, even if the bonus game is started, the first ending effect that is being executed is continued (timing t2).

After that, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section ends (timing t3), the first ending effect is ended. At that time, in the final game of the first ending effect, the end notification is performed in which characters such as "Congratulations" are displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first ending effect is ended by completely matching the end timing of the advantageous section. However, for example, in a configuration in which the ending effect is executed by repeatedly playing a moving image of a predetermined time length. Depending on the game pace of the player, if the ending effect is ended at the end timing of the advantageous section, the division in the effect may become worse. Therefore, the end timing of the first ending effect may be slightly (for example, about a few games) before or after the end timing of the advantageous section.

Then, after the first ending effect is completed, the bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is executed. That is, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the first ending effect, the start of the bonus effect is delayed with priority given to the first ending effect, and the bonus effect is started after the first ending effect is completed. It is configured. After that, when the bonus game ends at timing t4, the bonus effect started from timing t3 ends.

Next, a case where the second BB prize is established in the middle of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the upper limit increase number is reached will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b).

At the timing t11 in the advantageous section, when the start timing of the second ending effect is reached, the second ending effect is started. After that, in the game in which the second ending effect is being executed, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 and the second BB prize is established in that game, the bonus game in the second BB state starts from the next game. (Timing t12).

As already explained, the net increase in the number of cards per game in the AT mode is about 8.04, while the net increase in the number of cards per game in the second BB state is minus about 0.96. .. That is, by shifting to the second BB state, the state changes from a state in which the number of medals increases significantly to a state in which the number of medals gradually decreases. On the other hand, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (the number of digested games until reaching the upper limit increase number) referred to when determining the start timing (start game) of the second ending effect is the medal before the transition to the second BB state. It is grasped (estimated) based on the rate of increase of.

Therefore, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section changes due to the transition to the second BB state, and the end timing of the advantageous section deviates from the timing estimated at the start of the second ending effect (specifically, the advantageous section The number of remaining games will increase, and the end timing of the advantageous section will be delayed). In this case, in the present embodiment, the continuation of the second ending effect is not executed, and the second ending effect being executed is forcibly terminated. That is, the second ending effect is ended in the middle state without executing the end notification (timing t12).

Further, at the timing t2 when the bonus game is started, the bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is started. That is, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect, the second ending effect is stopped and the bonus effect is started. Then, when the bonus game ends at the timing t13, the bonus effect started from the timing t12 ends. Even if the bonus game ends, the second ending effect is not restarted.

After the end of the bonus game, the mode shifts to AT mode and the number of medals increases again. At timing t14, when the number of medals increased in the advantageous section (the number of MY for increasing or decreasing the advantageous section) reaches the upper limit, the advantageous section ends. To do. At that time, since the second ending effect has already been canceled, the end notification is not executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the second BB state is entered during the execution of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to the arrival of the upper limit increase number, the execution of the second ending effect is canceled.

Since the AT mode in the advantageous section is in a gaming state in which medals are likely to increase, the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number is likely to occur in the AT mode. Therefore, the second ending effect, which is performed in response to the end of the advantageous section when the upper limit increase number is reached, is likely to be performed during the AT mode. On the other hand, in the second BB state, the net increase in the number of medals per game is a negative value, and the game state is such that the number of medals decreases. Therefore, when the game shifts to the second BB state in the middle of the second ending effect performed in the AT mode, the rate of increase of medals turns negative, and the number of remaining games until the upper limit increase is reached is greatly increased. As a result, the end game of the advantageous section is significantly delayed, and there may be a disadvantage that the advantageous section does not end easily even though the second ending effect is performed to the end. In this respect, in this configuration, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect, the executing second ending effect is canceled, so that it is possible to avoid the ending effect being performed to the end. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the confusion of the player due to the ending effect and the advantageous section not being synchronized.

If the player shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the maximum number of games is reached, the first ending effect being executed is continued.

For example, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the ending effect, if the ending effect is always stopped, the ending effect may be interrupted frequently. In this respect, in this configuration, if the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the maximum number of games is reached, the ending effect is continued. When the advantageous section ends when the number of executed games in the advantageous section (number of advantageous section games AG) reaches the upper limit number of games, the end game of the advantageous section changes even if the transition to the second BB state occurs in the middle. There is no. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of interruption of the ending effect while synchronizing the ending effect with the advantageous section.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect, the second ending effect is not uniformly stopped, but may be canceled or continued. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

Here, the relationship between the number of remaining games until the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached and the number of remaining games until the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

For example, it is assumed that the number of remaining games until the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached is smaller than the number of remaining games until the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90A, the arrival timing (timing t1) of the upper limit increase number arrives before the arrival timing (timing t2) of the upper limit game number arrives, and the upper limit game number is reached. The maximum increase will be reached sooner.

In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 90B, if the transition to the second BB state is performed at the timing t11 before reaching the upper limit increase number, the medals do not increase during the second BB state, so that the medals in the advantageous section The increased number of sheets (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY) will not increase. As a result, the number of digested games (the number of remaining games) required to reach the maximum increase number will increase, and the timing of reaching the maximum increase number will be delayed (for details, at least the number of bonus games). The timing to reach the upper limit increase number is delayed by that amount). On the other hand, the number of digested games in the advantageous section (number of advantageous section games AG) is counted regardless of whether or not the bonus game is in progress, so depending on the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games at the start of the bonus game. , The maximum number of games may be reached earlier than the maximum number of games can be reached (timing t12).

In the present embodiment, in consideration of the possibility of the above-mentioned reversal phenomenon occurring, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect, whether to continue or cancel the ending effect is determined. I try to switch. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described in detail.

<Production setting process during bonus>
The effect setting process during the bonus according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process during the bonus shown in FIG. 87. In FIG. 91, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in the bonus middle effect setting process of FIG. 87, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S4601 (when the first ending flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S4602, and it is determined whether or not the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. When it is determined that the second ending flag is stored, that is, when the second ending flag is stored in the situation where the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the start command this time, the second ending flag is stored. The first BB prize or the second BB prize is established during the execution of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number, and the bonus game of the winning side in each of those BB states is started. Means that. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5101, and the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is grasped.

In the following step S5102, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section grasped in step S5101 is less than the predetermined number of games. In this case, as the predetermined number of games, the number of games equal to or less than the number of executed games in the first BB state or the second BB state is used. In the present embodiment, since only the second BB state can be transferred to the advantageous section of the first BB state or the second BB state, the number of games in the predetermined number is equal to or less than the number of executed games in the second BB state. Use numbers.

Here, as described above, the second BB state according to the present embodiment is configured to end on the condition that the number of medals paid out in the BB state reaches the upper limit payout number (46), so that a bonus The number of games from the start to the end of the game is not uniquely determined. Therefore, as the number of executed games in the second BB state, the expected value in design or the average value in actual results is used as the expected number of executed games. For example, when the expected number of executed games is 30, in the present embodiment, 30 games are used as the predetermined number of games. That is, in the present embodiment, in step S5102, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the bonus game.

Since the second BB state is a bonus game in which medals decrease, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in the middle of the advantageous section, the maximum number of games can be increased by at least the number of executed games in the second BB state. The number of remaining games will increase. That is, the determination in step S5102 (determination of whether or not the number of remaining games in the upper limit number of games is equal to or less than the number of executed games in the second BB state) also determines whether or not a reversal phenomenon actually occurs. ing.

If it is determined in step S5102 that the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (when the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is not reached during the execution of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S5103. The process of clearing (erasing) the second ending flag is executed. As a result, the second ending effect being executed is canceled. After the execution of step S5103, the process of grasping the current bonus type is performed in step S2703, and the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type is set in the subsequent step S2704. That is, the setting process for starting the bonus effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 that the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is less than the predetermined number of games (when the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the bonus game), step S5104 The continuation flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a. After that, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated without executing the processes of step S2703 and step S2704. That is, the second ending effect being executed is continued, and the bonus effect is not started. The continuation flag in step S5104 is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the second ending effect has been continued.

If a negative determination is made in step S2706 (when the pseudo precursor end flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S5105 to determine whether or not the BB middle end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. The BB middle end flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the first ending effect or the second ending effect has ended during the execution of the first BB state or the second BB state.

If it is determined that the BB middle end flag is stored, the process of clearing (erasing) the BB middle end flag is executed in step S5106, and then the process proceeds to step S2703. That is, if the first ending effect or the second ending effect is continued even after the transition to the bonus game, the bonus effect is controlled to start after the ending effects are completed.

<Production setting process when all stops>
The effect setting process at the time of total stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG. 88. Note that, in FIG. 92, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those of the effect setting process at the time of total stop in FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701 (when the first ending flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S5201 to determine whether or not the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. If it is determined that the second ending flag is not stored, the effect setting process at the time of this total stop is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second ending flag is stored, the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number is being executed, or the effect during bonus is set. In step S5102 of the process (FIG. 91), it is determined that the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games is less than the predetermined number of games, and it is determined that the second ending effect is continued even after the transition to the bonus game. means. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5202, and it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. When it is determined that the continuation flag is not stored, that is, when the advantageous section ends by reaching the upper limit increase number, the number of remaining games until the upper limit increase number is reached is grasped in step S5202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuation flag is stored, that is, if the second ending effect is continued even after the transition to the bonus game, the number of remaining games until the maximum number of games is reached is grasped in step S5204. To do.

After executing step S5203 or step S5204, the game proceeds to step S5205, and the number of remaining games grasped in each of the above steps should be referred to to end the second ending effect in which the current game is being executed or is continuing. Judge whether or not. That is, in the case of the second ending effect executed in response to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number, the ending is the game when the current game reaches the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section. In the case of the second ending effect, which is determined to be the end game of the effect and is continued after the transition to the bonus game, the end game of the ending effect is the case when the current game reaches the maximum number of games in the advantageous section. Is determined to be.

If it is determined that this game is not a game in which the second ending effect should be ended, the effect setting process at the time of this total stop is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that this game is a game in which the second ending effect should be ended, a process of clearing (erasing) the second ending flag is executed in step S5206. As a result, the second ending effect that is being executed or is being continued is completed.

In the following step S5207, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 183a. If it is determined that the continuation flag is stored, the process of clearing (erasing) the continuation flag is executed in step S5208. In the following step S5209, the BB middle end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the effect setting process at the time of all stops is terminated. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5207 (when the continuation flag is not stored), the effect setting process at the time of all stop is terminated without executing the processes of step S5208 and step S5209.

<Flow of ending production>
Next, the flow of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. 93. Here, the case where the second BB prize is established in the middle of the second ending effect (the ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number) (the case of shifting to the second BB state) will be described as an example. To do. The flow when the second BB prize is established in the middle of the first ending effect (ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section when the maximum number of games is reached) is the same as in the case of the sixth embodiment. The same is true.

At the timing t1 in the advantageous section, when the start timing of the second ending effect is reached, the second ending effect is started. After that, in the game in which the second ending effect is being executed, when the player plays a game with the number of bets set to 2 and the second BB prize is established in that game, the bonus game in the second BB state starts from the next game. (Timing t2).

At this time, the number of remaining games X in the advantageous section up to the maximum number of games is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games X is less than the predetermined number of games (30 games). For example, when the number of remaining games X is less than the predetermined number of games, the ending effect being executed is continued. That is, when the maximum number of games is reached and the advantageous section ends during the bonus game, in other words, the second ending effect ends because the number of remaining games increases up to the maximum number of games after shifting to the bonus game. If there is a difference between the timing and the timing of reaching the upper limit increase number, but the difference can be absorbed by the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the bonus game, the ending effect being executed should not be stopped.

In this case, as the continuous ending effect, a continuous effect is executed with respect to the second ending effect when the second BB prize is established. For example, if the second ending effect is configured to repeat playback of a 5-minute animation movie, the playback is continued as it is.

After that, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the timing (timing t3) at which the advantageous section ends is reached, the continuous second ending effect is ended. At that time, in the final game of the second ending effect, the end notification with characters such as "Congratulations" displayed is performed. Then, after the second ending effect is completed, the bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is executed.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining games X is larger than the predetermined number of games, the continuation of the second ending effect is not executed, and the second ending effect being executed is forcibly terminated. That is, if the maximum number of games is not reached during the bonus game and the advantageous section does not end, the difference between the end timing of the second ending effect and the arrival timing of the maximum increase number cannot be absorbed in the bonus game. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the second ending effect being executed is canceled. In this case, the bonus effect is executed at the start of the bonus game corresponding to the second BB state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the player shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number, whether or not to cancel the ending effect is the remaining games up to the upper limit number of games. It was configured to be judged by referring to the number.

As described in the sixth embodiment, when the end game of the advantageous section is significantly delayed in the middle of the ending effect, the ending effect is canceled so that the ending effect and the advantageous section are not synchronized with each other. It is preferable to suppress the confusion of the person. However, there is also a desire to reduce the chances of canceling as much as possible in order to show the ending effect to the end and induce the impression and joy of the player. In this regard, in this configuration, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect, the ending effect is not uniformly stopped, but the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games is referred to, and the maximum number of games is increased. If the maximum number of games is reached first as a result of the increase in the number of remaining games (when a reversal phenomenon occurs), the second ending effect being executed is not stopped. As a result, even if the player wins the second BB prize during the execution of the second ending effect, the opportunity to continue the second ending effect is secured, and the frequency with which the effect is canceled can be reduced. become.

When the second ending effect is continued, the ending effect is terminated when the maximum number of games is reached. In this configuration, when the ending effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the end condition of the ending effect is changed to correspond to the maximum number of games. Therefore, the continued second ending effect can be ended at the end of the advantageous section, and the ending effect and the advantageous section can be suitably synchronized.

The number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games in the case of shifting to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect is grasped, and the second ending is limited to the case where the number of remaining games is equal to or less than the number of executed games in the second BB state. The composition is such that the production is continued. That is, instead of expanding the range of continuation until the reversal phenomenon occurs after the end of the second BB state, the second ending effect is continued only when the advantageous section ends in the second BB state. .. As a result, it is possible to expand the opportunity for the ending effect to be continued while suppressing the execution period of the ending effect from being excessively extended.

<Other embodiments>
The description is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In the first to fifth embodiments, the precursor mode is extended by one game when the two-bet game is played, but conditions other than the two-bet game are satisfied. By doing so, the precursor mode may be extended. Further, if the condition for extending the precursor mode is satisfied, the extension for a plurality of games may occur.

(2) In the first to fifth embodiments, after the precursor mode is completed, the AT mode is shifted to the AT mode by winning the AT mode transition trigger, but the transition trigger is not provided. , It may be configured to shift to the AT mode when the precursor mode ends.

(3) In the first to fifth embodiments, the precursor counter is not updated when the two-bet game is played in the precursor mode. For example, the continuous production is started even in the precursor mode. In the past, the precursor counter may be updated even if the 2-bet game is played, and at least the precursor counter may not be updated when the 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous production.

(4) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the continuous effect for this precursor is always executed when the CZ mode or the like is won, but the CZ mode or the like is won and the continuous effect is executed. When the lottery is won, the continuous production for this precursor may be executed. Further, the continuous production for pseudo precursors is not limited to the configuration of the first to fifth embodiments described above, and for example, in a configuration in which an AT lottery is performed only for a part of specific roles, the AT lottery is triggered by the specific role. If the lottery is not selected, a continuous effect for pseudo-precursor may be performed at all times.

(5) In the first to fifth embodiments, the production progresses in units of one game in the continuous production, but the production may proceed in units of a plurality of games.

(6) In the first to fifth embodiments, the winning notification is performed in the final game of the continuous production, but the winning notification may be performed in the middle game of the continuous production. In this case, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the CZ mode or the like after the end of the continuous production, or the configuration shifts to the CZ mode or the like before the end of the continuous production (the continuous production continues even if the CZ mode or the like is started). May be good.

(7) In the first to fifth embodiments, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated at the start of the game. However, even if the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated at a timing other than the start of the game, for example, at the end of the game. Good.

(8) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated on the main control device 101 side, a command for updating the number of precursor games is output to the display control device 81. Therefore, the display control device 81 is configured to grasp that the number of precursor games has not been updated based on the fact that the command is not output, but the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated on the main control device 101 side. By outputting a command (command for not updating the number of precursor games) indicating that the number of remaining games is not updated, the display control device 81 may be notified that the number of precursor games is not updated. This also applies to the CZ mode, and when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is not updated on the main controller 101 side, a command (CZ game number non-update command) indicating that the remaining number of games is not updated is output. It may be configured to be used.

(9) In the first to fifth embodiments, a command indicating the number of remaining games may be transmitted to the display control device 81 in the middle of the precursor mode. According to such a configuration, even if there is a deviation in the number of remaining games recognized by the display control device 81 side for some reason, the deviation can be appropriately corrected. Therefore, in a configuration in which the precursor mode may not be updated, the recognition of the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 regarding the number of remaining games in the precursor mode can be more preferably matched. The command indicating the number of remaining games may be output together with the command for updating the number of precursor games and the above command for not updating the number of precursor games (information on the number of remaining games in the command for updating the number of precursor games and the command for not updating the number of precursor games). May be included), and may be output separately from those commands.

(10) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the continuous production for the present precursor is stopped due to the transition to the second BB state, the continuous production for the new precursor is executed after the second BB state. However, after the second BB state, the continuation of the canceled continuous production may be executed with the number of remaining games in the precursor mode. According to this configuration, winning notification can be performed by continuous production at the time of resumption. In addition, since it is avoided that the continuous production ends in the middle of the process, the continuous production is shown to the end, for example, when the execution frequency of the premium production is low and the continuous production is highly valuable to the player. Will be possible.

When resuming the continuous production, for example, when the transition to the second BB state occurs or when the second BB prize is established, the information indicating the type of the continuous production canceled and the progress of the continuous production are performed. It is preferable to retain (store) information indicating the condition (for example, the value of the continuous effect counter), and after the end of the second BB state, execute the continuous effect continuously based on the information. In this case, the number of games remaining in the precursor mode after the end of the second BB state may be grasped, but the number of games remaining in the continuous production (the number of games executed in the continuous production) remains the same as the number of games remaining in the precursor mode. Therefore, it is not always necessary to re-acknowledge the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

(11) In the first to fifth embodiments, whether or not to execute the continuous effect after the end of the second BB state is switched according to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the end of the second BB state. May be good. For example, when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the minimum number of games in which continuous production can be executed (3 games in the first to fourth embodiments and two games in the fifth embodiment), the second BB state If the number of games is less than the minimum number of games, the continuous effect after the second BB state may not be executed.

It should be noted that the switching of whether or not to execute the continuous effect after the end of the second BB state is not limited to the one based on the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the end of the second BB state, for example, the effect switch 66 or the like. It may be used and can be selected by the player.

(12) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, the continuous effect is executed in a predetermined number of games during the second BB state or before the end of the second BB state. It may be configured to perform a notification indicating that it is on standby or on hold (for example, a notification for displaying characters such as "waiting for continuous production"). According to such a configuration, even if the continuous production is stopped without being clear due to the transition to the second BB state and the bonus production is executed, the continuous continuous production is re-executed later. Can be recognized by a person. As a result, for example, it is possible to eliminate the anxiety of the player that the winning of the CZ mode or the like may have been canceled by establishing the second BB prize, and the player can feel at ease in the second BB. It becomes possible to advance the bonus game.

(13) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, it is possible to switch between executing a new continuous effect and executing a continuous effect. May be. For example, the above switching is performed according to the type of continuous effect executed at the time of transition to the second BB state. In this case, if the continuous effect executed at the time of transition to the second BB state is a continuous effect having a relatively high execution frequency, a new continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, while the transition to the second BB state is performed. When the continuous effect that is sometimes executed is an effect that is executed infrequently, such as a premium effect, the continuous effect that continues after the end of the second BB state is executed. According to such a configuration, while suppressing that the highly rare continuous production can be seen only halfway due to the transition to the second BB state, the normal continuous production that is not expected to be of interest to that extent is canceled. It is possible to clarify the distinction between the continuous effect that was executed before and the continuous effect after the second BB state, and to suppress the confusion of the player by confusing the two.

The switching between executing a new continuous effect and executing a continuous continuous effect is not limited to the above, and may be selected by the player using, for example, an effect switch 66 or the like.

(14) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when the specific effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, the type of continuous effect is randomly selected, but at the time of transition to the second BB state. The configuration may be set so that a continuous effect of a type different from the continuous effect that has been executed is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to further clarify the distinction between the continuous effect that was executed before the cancellation and the continuous effect after the second BB state.

(15) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, both the winning notification and the transition to the special state (CZ mode, etc.) are waited for by the transition to the precursor mode, but any one of them. It may be configured so that only waits. For example, even if only the winning notification is on standby, the timing of the winning notification recognized by the main control device 101 and the recognition by the display control device 81 side are recognized by the extension of the precursor mode triggered by the 2-bet game. The timing of the winning notification will be different, and it is expected that each of the above embodiments will function effectively as a countermeasure against such an event.

(16) In the first and second embodiments, when the 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect in the precursor mode, the preliminary effect is executed, but the continuous effect is performed in the CZ mode. If a two-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect, the preliminary effect may be executed. In a configuration in which a winning notification is given at the end of the CZ mode or the AT mode is entered after the end of the CZ mode, the CZ mode functions as a standby period as in the precursor mode, so a 2-bet game is played during the CZ mode. If an event occurs in which the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is not updated, the continuous production and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode will not be synchronized. It is expected that each of the above embodiments will function effectively as a countermeasure against such an event. The continuous effect in the CZ mode may be the same as the continuous effect in the precursor mode, or may be dedicated to the CZ mode.

(17) In the first and second embodiments, the preliminary effect is executed by the same effect means as the effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) that executes the continuous effect, but another effect means is used. It may be configured to execute a preliminary effect.

(18) In the first and second embodiments, when the 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect, the preliminary effect is inserted in the middle of the continuous effect, but the preliminary effect is continuously produced. It may be configured to be executed by replacing the production inside. For example, in a situation where the production of the precursor scenario H-2 is scheduled to be executed in the second game from the start of the continuous production, the production of the precursor scenario H-2 is executed when the 2-bet game is played. Then, when the 3-bet game is played in the third game after that, the production of the next precursor scenario H-3 may be executed for the present precursor scenario H-2.

(19) In the first and second embodiments, the production data (image data) for the preliminary production for one game is set as data having a smaller capacity than the production data (image data) for one game for continuous production. May be good. In this case, since the data for the preliminary effect is kept small, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data. Preliminary effects are preliminary effects when the precursor mode is extended and are basically not executed. By keeping the data of such effects small, the original continuous effect data and other effects can be obtained. It is possible to suppress the pressure on the storage area of the production data. In addition, by reducing the data capacity of the preliminary effect, it becomes possible to read it in a short time, which is a preferable mode in terms of the nature of the preliminary effect, which is suddenly executed due to the extension of the precursor mode during the execution of the continuous effect. Become.

(20) In the first and second embodiments described above, the preliminary effect setting process is performed in the same game as the continuous effect setting process, and is performed in the game before the preliminary effect execution game. A game in which the effect is to be executed (in other words, a game in which a two-bet game is played) may be configured to perform the setting process of the effect.

Further, in the first and second embodiments, the preliminary effect setting process is performed in advance, but when the effect data (image data) of the preliminary effect is stored in the compressed data format, the preliminary effect setting process is performed in advance. The decompression process (decompression) may be performed in advance. In this case, it is not always necessary to pre-decompress all the effect data of the preliminary effect. For example, the effect data of the preliminary effect for the third game from the start of the continuous effect is stored in the game before the third game (for example, the second game). ) May be used to decompress some of the production data in advance.

(21) In the first and second embodiments, when the two-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor, the preliminary effect is not executed, but the preliminary effect is executed. May be. In this case, it is possible to prevent the winning state from being known in advance depending on the presence or absence of the preliminary effect, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the end of the continuous effect for a long time.

(22) In the first and second embodiments, the configurations of both embodiments may be combined. Specifically, there may be a case where the preliminary effect is executed in a game in which the 2-bet game is played, and a case where the preliminary effect is executed in a game after the game in which the 2-bet game is played. .. For example, depending on the progress of the continuous production (how many games have been played since the start of the continuous production, etc.), whether to execute the preliminary production in the game in which the 2-bet game was played, or the game in which the 2-bet game was played. It may be configured to switch whether to execute the preliminary effect in a later game. According to this, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the preliminary effect is immediately executed if the timing is good in the flow of the continuous effect, and the continuous effect is given priority and the preliminary effect is postponed if the timing is bad. it can. Further, the above switching is performed according to the type of continuous production. For example, in the case of the first continuous production, the preliminary production is executed in the game in which the 2-bet game is played, and in the case of the second continuous production, the 2-bet game is performed. It may be configured to execute the preliminary effect in a game after the game.

The switching between executing the preliminary effect in the game in which the 2-bet game is played or executing the preliminary effect in the game after the game in which the 2-bet game is played is not limited to the above, for example. The player may be able to select the effect switch 66 or the like.

(23) In the first and second embodiments, the continuous effect may not be executed after the end of the second BB state. In this case, after the end of the second BB state, a final effect (for example, the effect of FIG. 66A) may be executed to notify the winning, and the state may be in a state of waiting for transition to the AT mode or the like.

(24) In the first and second embodiments described above, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, it is possible to switch whether to stop or continue the continuous effect being executed. It may be configured as such. For example, depending on the type of continuous effect being executed, the continuous effect may be switched between being stopped and continued, or the player may be able to select using the effect switch 66 and the like.

(25) In the first embodiment described above, different types of preliminary effects are executed according to the type and progress of the continuous effects, but a common preliminary effect is executed regardless of the type and progress of the continuous effects. May be configured to execute.

(26) In the first embodiment, the dedicated effect as the preliminary effect is provided, but at least a part of the effect image as the continuous effect (for example, when the effect switch 66 is operated) as at least a part of the preliminary effect. The cut-in image displayed on the screen may be used. In this case, it is possible to execute a preliminary effect that is highly relevant to the continuous effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of data due to the preliminary effect.

(27) In the first embodiment, the scenario data table of the preliminary effect is stored in the same storage means (RAM183) as the scenario data table of the continuous effect, but in a storage means different from the scenario data table of the continuous effect. It may be a configuration to be memorized.

(28) In the first embodiment described above, the preliminary effect is executed each time the 2-bet game is played, but the number of times the 2-bet game is played (the number of extended games in the precursor mode) is a predetermined number (for example). If the number of times is 2 times or 2 games or more, the preliminary effect is executed, and if the number is less than the predetermined number, the preliminary effect is not executed. Further, each time the number of 2-bet games reaches a predetermined number, one preliminary effect may be executed. According to these configurations, a slight deviation may occur between the continuous production and the end game of the precursor mode, but if the deviation is within the allowable range, the progress of the continuous production is prioritized and the preliminary production is used. It is possible to reduce the interruption of continuous production.

(29) In the first embodiment, the scenario data table is configured to set the information of the present precursor preliminary scenario in association with the value of the continuous counter, but the progress of the continuous effect (for example, in the continuous effect). As a configuration to be set in association with each production during continuous production (for example, this precursor scenario H-2 in association with this precursor scenario H-2) and the information such as the first production and the second production). May be good.

(30) In the second embodiment described above, as a preliminary effect, the effect of the main precursor preliminary scenario H-battle of one game configuration is repeated for the number of extended games of the precursor mode, but the length (number of games). A plurality of preliminary effects having different lengths may be prepared, and a preliminary effect having a length corresponding to the number of extended games in the precursor mode may be selected and executed from among these preliminary effects.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, only one type of the main precursor preliminary scenario H-battle production is provided as the preliminary production. For example, in addition to the main precursor preliminary scenario H-battle production, the enemy Prepare multiple types of preliminary effects, such as the character 212 launching an attack, the warrior character 211 and the enemy character 212 facing each other, and providing effects, and these preliminary effects are the number of extended games in the precursor mode. It may be configured to execute by combining only the minutes.

(32) In the formation of the second embodiment, when the two-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect, the effect mode of the continuous effect may be changed so as to perform the revival effect. For example, when the number of executed games is set to 4 and the continuous production is set, if a 2-bet game is played in the middle of the continuous production, a miss notification effect (defeat) is produced in the 4th game from the start of the continuous production. The configuration is such that the production and transformation failure production are executed, and the winning notification (success production and transformation success production) is executed in the next game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of games for which continuous production is executed while preventing a contradiction from the result of the winning / losing lottery, and it is possible to cope with the delay in the transition to the CZ mode or the like.

In addition, depending on the number of times of the 2-bet game, the effect mode of the continuous effect being executed may be changed to the revival effect or the preliminary effect may be inserted. For example, if the number of 2-bet games from the start of the continuous production to the predetermined game is 1 (when the precursor mode is extended by 1 game), the change to the revival production is performed and the number of 2-bet games is 2 times. In the above case (when the precursor mode is extended by two or more games), it is preferable to insert the preliminary effect as described in the second embodiment.

(33) In the second embodiment, the preliminary effect may or may not be performed according to the number of 2-bet games counted by the preliminary effect counter (the number of extended games in the precursor mode). Good. Specifically, if the number of extended games in the precursor mode is less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, one game), the preliminary effect may not be executed, and if the number of extended games is larger than the predetermined number, the preliminary effect may be executed. .. That is, when the extension of the precursor mode is within the permissible range, the continuation of the continuous effect may be prioritized and the preliminary effect may not be executed.

(34) In the third and fourth embodiments, the preliminary effect is not executed when the two-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the precursor, but the first embodiment is performed. It may be configured to execute the preliminary effect as in the embodiment or the second embodiment.

(35) In the third embodiment, the AT winning notification effect (confirmed effect) shown in FIG. 66A is executed as the standby effect after the continuous effect. For example, while waiting for the end of the precursor mode. An effect other than the final effect may be executed, such as a notification or effect that the player can recognize.

(36) In the third embodiment, the player may be notified of the number of standby games (the number of remaining games in the precursor mode) at least after the continuous production. At that time, it is preferable that the number of remaining games indicated by the above notification decreases each time the number of remaining games is updated, for example, by displaying a countdown. The above notification may be performed during the continuous production, or may be performed after the continuous production is completed. However, with the former configuration, it becomes clear that this is a precursor (that is, a winning state) before the end of the continuous production, so the player's expectation can be maintained until the end of the continuous production. Then, the latter configuration is preferable.

(37) In the fourth embodiment, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, the subsequent continuous effect is changed to the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. It is not always necessary to change all the continuous production after the transition to the second BB state to the continuous production for the pseudo precursor, and after continuing the continuous production for this precursor, only the last (the end of the continuous production) will be notified. It may be changed or a part of the final stage (the part of the final game of the continuous production) may be changed to a pseudo-precursor.

(38) In the fourth embodiment, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor is changed, or the continuous effect being executed is canceled or is stopped. The configuration may be such that the interruption may be switched.

For example, the configuration may be such that the number of remaining games of the continuous effect at the time of transition to the second BB state is grasped, and whether or not the effect mode is changed according to the grasped number of remaining games is switched. Specifically, when the number of remaining games grasped above is larger than the predetermined number (for example, one game), the continuous production (disengagement notification) for pseudo precursors is changed, and the number of remaining games grasped above is equal to or less than the predetermined number. In the case of, the continuous production is stopped and the bonus production is executed.

If the continuous production is advanced to some extent, the player may generally determine the hit. If such a player switches to the off notification when the hit is almost known, there is a concern that the player may be disliked and the interest in the continuous production may be reduced. In this respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the execution of the disengagement notification in a state where the player is substantially aware of the hit.

In addition, the above switching may be performed depending on the type of continuous effect being executed. For example, in the case of the first continuous effect, the continuous effect (disengagement notification) for a similar sign is changed, and in the case of the second continuous effect, the continuous effect being executed is canceled or interrupted. For example, the first continuous effect has an effect configuration in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the result is correct or not until the final stage, whereas the second continuous effect has a fixed or highly likely hit at the time of execution. In some cases, this configuration may be used.

(39) In the fourth embodiment, the scenario data table is rewritten when the first game in the second BB state is started when the production mode of the continuous production is changed to that for pseudo precursors. The configuration may be rewritten at the end of the game in which the second BB prize is established.

(40) In the fourth embodiment, when the continuous effect for the present precursor is executed, it corresponds to the establishment of a specific opportunity (execution opportunity of the continuous effect) or the execution of the continuous effect, in addition to the continuous effect. A specific notification (a notification that the player can recognize or infer that a specific trigger has been established or that continuous production is being executed) may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the specific notification is continued even after the production mode of the continuous production for the present precursor is changed to the one for the pseudo precursor with the transition to the second BB state. According to this configuration, even when the effect mode is changed to the pseudo-precursor due to the transition to the second BB state, the player can determine that he / she is actually in the winning state by seeing the above-mentioned specific notification. Becomes possible. At that time, in order to make the notification known to those who know the specific notification and to arouse the superiority complex of the player who grasps the winning state based on the specific notification, the production means in which the specific notification is continuously produced. A mode other than the (auxiliary display unit 65) notification means (for example, an upper lamp 63 or a dedicated lamp unit) may be used, or a specific notification mode may be less noticeable than a continuous effect (for example, the display size may be that of a continuous effect). It is preferable to make it smaller than

In addition, when a specific notification is displayed on the display, the display position of the specific notification after the production mode of the continuous production is changed for a pseudo precursor is set in order to prevent the player from losing sight of the notification and being confused. , It is preferable that the display position is the same as the display position immediately before the change. At that time, for example, when performing a specific notification on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, it is preferable that the display position on the display screen is the same position. However, in the case of enhancing the superiority complex of a player who knows the existence and role of the notification by making it difficult to notice, the display position of the specific notification may be different before and after the change. Incidentally, the above-mentioned specific notification may be continued at least until the continuous effect executed after the end of the second BB state ends (until the final game of the continuous effect ends).

The configurations described in (40) above can also be applied to the first and second embodiments. That is, when the continuous effect for the present precursor is executed, the specific notification is performed, and when the continuous effect is canceled or interrupted due to the transition to the second BB state, the specific notification is continued even after the cancellation or interruption. It may be configured to be used.

(41) In the fourth embodiment, the winning notification may be performed not in the final game of the continuous production for this omen but in a predetermined game in the middle. In such a configuration, when the state shifts to the second BB state before the execution of the winning notification, the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed to the one for the pseudo precursor, and when the state shifts to the second BB state after the execution of the winning notification, The continuous production for this precursor may be continued as it is without changing the production mode, or the continuous production being executed may be canceled or interrupted.

In addition, in the case of a winning state such as CZ mode, in a configuration in which the reach eyes can be stopped in each reel 32L to 32R, if the second BB state is entered before the reach eyes are stopped, If the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed to that for the pseudo precursor and the state shifts to the second BB state after the reach is stopped, the effect mode is not changed and the continuous effect for the present precursor is continued or executed. It may be configured to cancel or interrupt the continuous production inside. The reach item referred to here is a specific symbol combination that can be stopped on the effective line when the CZ mode or the like (excluding the second BB) is won, and cannot be stopped in the non-winning state. Therefore, it is an outlier that does not correspond to any winning combination.

(42) In the fourth embodiment, when changing the effect mode of the continuous effect to the one for pseudo precursors, it is executed at the time of transition to the second BB state in order to correspond the type to the continuous effect before the change. Although the configuration is such that the type of continuous effect for this precursor is grasped, the configuration may be such that the type set by the setting process of step S2209 is grasped.

(43) In the fourth embodiment, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor, the effect mode is changed so as to notify the disconnection. For example, a draw. It may be configured to perform a notification different from the disengagement notification such as a production (draw notification). In addition, the draw effect may be a dedicated effect when the precursor mode is extended in the middle of the continuous effect. In this case, by executing the draw effect, the player can recognize the winning of the CZ mode or the like. Further, the draw effect may be configured to be executed in a continuous effect for the main omen when the omen mode is not extended, or in a continuous effect for the pseudo omen. At that time, in the continuous production for this omen, the winning effect (winning notification) is performed after the draw effect is performed, and in the continuous effect for the pseudo omen, the draw effect is performed. After that, it is advisable to perform a disengagement effect (disengagement notification).

(44) In the fifth embodiment, when executing the continuous effect using the remaining precursor modes after the second BB state, the continuous effect is started from the final game of the bonus game of the second BB. , The continuous production may be started when the number of remaining games of the bonus game reaches a predetermined number of two or more games. In this case, the predetermined number of games is obtained by subtracting the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the second BB state (for example, 1 game) from the number of games executed in the continuous production using the precursor mode remaining after the second BB state (for example, 3 games). (For example, 2 games). At that time, first, the number of games to be executed in the continuous production is determined by lottery or the like without referring to the number of games remaining in the precursor mode after the second BB state, and then the number of games remaining in the precursor mode is determined from the determined number of executed games. The number of insufficient games obtained by subtracting the above may be set as the predetermined number of games.

Since the number of games executed in the bonus game fluctuates, it is difficult to accurately specify the number of remaining games, but for example, the number of games executed in the bonus game is specified based on the expected value in design or the average value in actual results. Alternatively, it is estimated, the number of digested games since the start of the bonus game is subtracted from the value, and when the subtracted value reaches the predetermined number of games, the continuous production is started. In this case, although the deviation from the precursor mode is likely to occur as compared with the case where the continuous production is started from the final game, a large number of games that can be added can be secured, and due to the limitation of the number of executed games, after the second BB state. It is possible to prevent the continuous production using the remaining precursor modes from giving a light impression.

If the number of executed games of the specified or estimated bonus game does not match the actual number of executed games and the former is less than the latter, it is a precursor to the number of remaining games of continuous production at the end of the bonus game. There are more games left in the mode. As a result, the precursor mode ends after the end of the continuous production, and even if the winning notification is executed in the continuous production, the mode does not shift to the CZ mode or the like. In this case, as in the first and second embodiments, the winning notification in the continuous effect may be delayed by executing the preliminary effect related to the continuous effect being executed.

At that time, the preliminary effect may be performed with a number or length corresponding to the surplus of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode with respect to the number of remaining games of the continuous effect. Further, the preliminary effect may be executed in the next game after the end of the bonus game, or may be executed in a game after that (executed at a place with a good break in the flow of the continuous effect). By the way, the above surplus can be specified at the end of the final game of the bonus game or the bonus game. Therefore, the preliminary effect setting process may be performed when the final game of the bonus game is started or when the bonus game ends.

(45) In the fifth embodiment, the number of remaining games is specified based on the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of bonus games to be paid out, and the number of remaining games is a predetermined number (1 (final in the fifth embodiment)). It is configured to determine whether or not it is a game)), but for example, if the number of games to be executed in the bonus game is uniquely determined, the remaining games are based on the number of digested games since the bonus game is started. It may be configured to specify the number.

(46) In the sixth embodiment, when the second ending effect being executed is stopped due to the transition to the second BB state, the ending effect is not executed after the end of the second BB state, but the second BB state is provided. The ending effect may be executed after the end of. According to such a configuration, since the ending effect after the end of the second BB state is executed to the end, even if the previous second ending effect is canceled in the middle due to the transition to the second BB state, it is advantageous for the player. It becomes possible to appropriately notify the end of the section.

In that case, as the ending effect after the end of the second BB state, the continuation of the canceled second ending effect may be executed, or as the ending effect after the end of the second BB state, the canceled second ending effect may be executed. It may be configured to execute a new ending effect that is not a continuation of.

Further, the configuration may be such that it is possible to switch between executing the continuation of the canceled second ending effect and executing a new ending effect. For example, when multiple types of bonus games with different lengths (upper limit payouts) are provided, depending on the type of bonus game (in other words, the length of the bonus game) that was transferred during the execution of the second ending effect. The configuration is such that the above switching is performed. Specifically, in the case of a bonus game with a short execution period, the continuation of the canceled ending effect is executed as the ending effect after the bonus game, and in the case of a bonus game with a long execution period, the ending effect after the bonus game is executed. As a result, a new ending effect is executed.

In the second BB bonus game, the net increase in the number of games per game is a negative value, and the number of medals is reduced. Therefore, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section after the end of the second BB state (upper limit increase). The number of games remaining until the number is reached) is likely to be higher than that at the time of transition to the second BB state. Therefore, when executing the ending effect after the end of the second BB state, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (the number of remaining games until the upper limit increase number is reached) is grasped again, and the ending effect is corresponding to the remaining number of games. Should be executed.

Further, the player may be able to select whether to execute the continuation of the canceled second ending effect or to execute the new ending effect by using the effect switch 66 or the like.

(47) In the sixth embodiment, when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the first ending effect, the ending effect is continued, but it is canceled or interrupted as in the second ending effect. It may be configured. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the first ending effect is only continued in relation to the precursor mode, and the first ending effect is canceled or interrupted due to circumstances other than the precursor mode. There is nothing to deny.

(48) In the sixth embodiment described above, in the second ending effect, the end notification (character notification such as "Congratulations" or "END") is executed in the final game of the ending effect. The notification may be performed over a plurality of games (for example, 5 games retroactive from the end of the advantageous section). In such a configuration, when the end notification is executed (started) and then the second BB state is entered, the end of the advantageous section has already been notified, so that the second ending effect is continued as it is and the end notification is given. The second ending effect being executed may be canceled or interrupted only when the state shifts to the second BB state before the execution (start) of.

(49) In the sixth embodiment, the ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section is illustrated, but the ending effect corresponds to the end of the gaming state other than the advantageous section. May be good.

(50) In the sixth embodiment, the ending effect is performed by repeatedly playing the animation movie for a certain period of time, but at least a part of the ending effect progresses according to the execution of the game. It may be configured to be used. In such a configuration, if the number of remaining games of the ending effect may increase in the middle as in the seventh embodiment, it is necessary to deal with such a case. For example, the first and the above As in the second embodiment, it is preferable to execute the preliminary effect (preliminary effect related to the ending effect being executed) of the number of times or the length according to the increase in the number of remaining games.

(51) In the seventh embodiment, the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games is 30 games (expected number of bonus games to be executed) in determining whether or not to cancel the second ending effect being executed. Although it is configured to determine whether or not it is less, it may be configured to determine whether or not the number of remaining games is smaller than the number of games (for example, 10 games) that is smaller than the expected number of bonus games to be executed. According to this configuration, for example, in a situation where the advantageous section ends during the bonus game, if a sufficient period for the bonus effect can be secured even if the second ending effect is continued, the second ending effect is continued. On the other hand, if the period for the bonus effect is insufficient when the second ending effect is continued, the second ending effect can be canceled. That is, it becomes possible to decide whether to cancel or continue the second ending effect by further considering the execution status of the bonus effect.

(52) In the seventh embodiment, whether or not a reversal phenomenon occurs in determining whether or not to cancel the second ending effect being executed (the maximum number of games is reached before the maximum number of games is increased). It may be configured to determine (whether or not to do). Further, in the seventh embodiment, the ending effect is continued when the reversal phenomenon occurs during the bonus game (when the maximum number of games is reached during the bonus game), but the reversal phenomenon occurs after the bonus game. (When the maximum number of games is reached earlier than the maximum number of games after the bonus game), the ending effect may be continued. In this case, the ending effect is executed across the bonus games.

(53) In the seventh embodiment, the first ending effect and the second ending effect may have different production modes. In this case, if it is determined that the second ending effect being executed is to be continued, the second ending effect may be continued as it is, or the ending effect may be continued by changing to the first ending effect. However, the former configuration is preferable in order not to give an unnatural impression to the player.

(54) In the seventh embodiment, the player can recognize or guess that the advantageous section ends when the upper limit increase number is reached (for example, teach the remaining number up to the upper limit increase number). Alternatively, the suggestive notification) may be performed during the execution of the second ending effect. In such a configuration, if the player shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect and determines that the ending effect is to be continued, the above-mentioned is performed in the continued ending effect (ending effect that ends when the maximum number of games is reached). It may be configured so that the first notification is not executed (erased).

Further, in the continuous ending effect, the player can recognize or estimate that the advantageous section ends when the maximum number of games is reached (for example, teach or teach the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games). It may be configured to execute the suggestion notification). In this case, the second notification may be performed even in the ending effect that was started as the first ending effect from the beginning.

(55) In each of the above embodiments, the addition of the number of games in the CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode is illustrated as a special state advantageous to the player, but the special state is not limited to these, and for example, ART. It may be a mode or the like.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games or when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY reaches the upper limit increase number. The advantageous section may end even when the AT mode ends.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to one predetermined fixed value, but a plurality of upper limit games are provided and selected from among them by lottery, set value, or the like. The advantageous section may end depending on the maximum number of games. In addition, the upper limit increase number is not limited to one fixed value set in advance, and a plurality of upper limit game numbers are set, and an advantageous section is set according to the upper limit increase number selected by lottery or set value from among them. May be configured to end.

(58) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus game in which the number of medals decreases is illustrated as a bonus game, but the number of medals may not increase (does not increase or decrease) or may increase slightly (compared to in AT mode). The rate of increase in medals is low). As a bonus game with a slight increase, the expected net increase in the number of cards per game may be less than 0.5.

In addition, in that the rate of increase in medals changes from the game state up to that point, the number of medals may increase normally (advantageous to the player) rather than a slight increase. In this case, the medal increase rate may be higher than that of the AT mode, or the medal increase rate may be lower than that of the AT mode and higher than that of the normal gaming state (normal mode or CZ mode). Good.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, the bonus game is illustrated as a specific state, but a game other than the bonus game may be used as long as the precursor mode is extended.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even in the normal section. In this case, the superiority of the advantageous section is ensured by configuring the normal section to be less likely to win the AT mode transition than the advantageous section.

(61) In each of the above embodiments, the continuous effect is executed by the notification means such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, but the continuous effect is executed by a notification means different from these notification means. May be good. In particular, by using separate notification means for the notification means for executing the push order notification effect and the specific combination notification effect and the notification means for executing the continuous effect, the presence or absence of transition to the AT mode, the push order bell, and the identification Events with different interests of the player, such as whether or not a role is missed, are notified by different notification means. For example, too much attention is paid to continuous production, and a push order bell or a stop switch when a specific role is won. It is possible to suppress an event in which operations 42 to 44 are mistaken. Further, the ending effect may be executed by a notification means other than the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

Further, the continuous effect, the preliminary effect, and the ending effect are not limited to those executed by the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and may be a light emission effect using a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable effect. It may be an accessory production using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for the purpose, or it may be a combination of these. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be, for example, auditory using sound effects.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, the game by the 3-bet game performed in the state where the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game is carried over is described as a normal game, but the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game is carried over. The game by the 2-bet game played in the state may be a normal game, or the second-bet game or the third-bet game played without carrying over the first BB or the second BB may be a normal game. Further, a game by a 2-bet game performed in a state where the second BB is carried over may be a normal game, or a game by a 3-bet game performed in a state where the first BB is carried over may be a normal game. Further, the game may be advanced while switching each of these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, based on the first switching opportunity, for example, any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game is switched to any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game, and based on the second switching opportunity, for example. Switching from any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game to any of the above games performed in the 2-bet game may be regarded as a normal game.

(63) The winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery and the game result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery are not limited to those exemplified in each of the above embodiments.

In addition, although the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery is configured to shift to the advantageous section, it may be configured to shift to the advantageous section in the next game of the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery. A predetermined number of games may exist between the winning game and the game shifting to the advantageous section.

Further, in the game of shifting to the advantageous section, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is started, but in the game following the game of shifting to the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 The display may be started, or a predetermined number of games may exist between the game for shifting to the advantageous section and the game for starting the display of the eighth display segment N8.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, the payout rate is changed according to each set value, the setting 1 has the lowest payout rate, and the setting 6 has the highest payout rate. The configuration may be such that the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of the balls (game medium) change depending on the situation. For example, the ball output rates of some set values may be the same, such as the ball output rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2 being the same, but the ball output rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in settings 1 and 5, a predetermined amount of balls is ejected in a short time and a predetermined amount is decreased in a long time, and in settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The reduction of a predetermined amount may take less time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may have a configuration in which the increase or decrease of the number of balls is hardly generated. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(65) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to 1 line in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

(66) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type game machine) having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a ball-using rotating game machine, a configuration having a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball ejection rate, etc., and the above inventions may be applied as suggestions and teaching effects of these set values. Good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and a predetermined state may be applied. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball entry rate into the ball entry portion is high or low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 are set as the high ball entry state. Each invention may be applied. Further, in the pachinko machine, the period during which the 3-bet game is played in the standby period such as the precursor mode and the CZ mode (the period during which the number of remaining games in each mode is updated) is the game of the first special figure (the first special). The second special figure is the period during which the 2-bet game and the bonus game in the second BB state are performed (the period during which the number of remaining games in each of the above modes is not updated), which is applied to the period during which the variable display in the figure is performed. It may be applied to the period during which the game (variation display of the second special figure) is performed.

(67) In each of the above embodiments, when a medal as a game medium is inserted, the number of bets is set and the game can be started, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, this does not deny a medalless type game machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type game machine, for example, a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) can be used to set the number of bets on the game so that the game can be started, and the above-mentioned benefits corresponding to the winning of the game are described above. It is preferable that a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals is given. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the game machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it is preferable to have a configuration for notifying information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in each of the following feature groups are "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. We know a configuration in which a player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of games in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Special whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the trigger of the transition lottery) Special determination means for executing determination (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101),
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, transformation success effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, management of the number of second games) that can set a waiting period (precursor mode, CZ mode) so that at least one of (Function to execute processing (processing to set CZ counter)) and
When the waiting period has elapsed, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the AT mode transition trigger) is satisfied after the waiting period has elapsed, the special state transition to shift the gaming state to the special state is performed. Means (a function to execute the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) and
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, a specific effect (continuous effect) executed over a plurality of games is started in a predetermined game during the waiting period, and the predetermined effect is executed in the specific effect. Specific effect setting means (a function of setting the information of this precursor scenario in the scenario data table by the display control device 81) for setting the specific notification to be executed in the specific game after the game, and
The specific effect executing means (display control) for executing the specific effect on the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table). (A function to execute the continuous effect execution process by the device 81) and
At least when a predetermined condition (the game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is specified to be longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means. Means (a function of executing a game number update process (a function that does not update the precursor counter and the CZ counter in the case of a 2-bet game) by the main control device 101) and
If the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the execution game is delayed so that the execution game of the specific notification becomes a game after the specific game set by the specific effect setting means. Means (function to execute continuous effect setting process and continuous effect execution process by display control device 81 (function to execute effect of this precursor preliminary scenario)),
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when the judgment result of the special judgment based on the establishment of the predetermined judgment opportunity becomes a specific result, at least one of the transition to a special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification that the specific result is won is provided. The waiting period to be waited for is set. In this waiting period, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games, and the specific notification is performed in the specific game during the specific effect. Then, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the lapse of the waiting period or after the lapse of the waiting period, the gaming state is shifted to the special state. That is, after the specific notification is performed in the specific effect and the player is notified of the winning, the game state is changed to a special state or a state in which the game state can be changed (a state in which the state is changed when the transition condition is satisfied). ing.

Here, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied at least during the execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is extended and the end game of the period is delayed. On the other hand, since the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are different. For this reason, even though the winning is notified by the specific notification, there may be an inconvenience that the player does not easily shift to the special state, and there is a concern that the player's trust in the production may be lowered. In this respect, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the execution game of the specific notification is delayed so that the specific notification is performed in the game after the initially set specific game. .. As a result, the execution timing of the specific notification can be delayed according to the extension of the waiting period, and it is possible to eliminate the difference between the waiting period and the specific effect. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In this feature, as a prerequisite configuration, "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a symbol (design) is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the symbol is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied". Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R area visible through 26L, 26M, 26L) is provided, variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. Is a game machine in which the game is played as one game when the game is stopped. ”

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the delay means delays the execution game with respect to the specific game by the same period as the period in which the waiting period is extended by the specific means.

According to the above configuration, since the execution game of the specific notification is delayed by the amount of the extension of the waiting period, the waiting period and the specific effect can be suitably synchronized. As a result, even if the waiting period is extended, it is possible to perform specific notification at the intended timing (in other words, the design timing at the time of production design) for the waiting period.

Feature A3. The specific means makes the waiting period longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the waiting period.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied during the waiting period and before the execution of the specific effect, a second delay means (a function of executing the continuous effect standby process by the display control device 81) for delaying the start of the specific effect is provided. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that it is provided.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the waiting period, the waiting period is extended, so that the remaining waiting period is specified not only during the execution of the specific effect but also when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the execution. There may be a gap with the production. In this regard, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied before the execution of the specific effect during the waiting period, the start of the specific effect is delayed, so that the waiting period is extended either during the execution of the specific effect or before the execution. However, it is possible to preferably eliminate the gap between the remaining waiting period and the specific effect.

Feature A4. When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the delay means is a preliminary effect executing means (continuous by the display control device 81) that executes a preliminary effect (effect of the precursory preliminary scenario) related to the specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is characterized by having a function of executing an effect setting process and a process for executing a continuous effect.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the gap in the effect due to the delay of the specific notification can be filled by the preliminary effect. At this time, for example, if the configuration is such that an effect unrelated to the specific effect is executed as a preliminary effect, the player may be given the impression that the specific effect has suddenly ended. Especially for the player who was watching the specific production while expecting the winning, it may give the impression that the winning has disappeared, and there is a concern that the player may be confused. In this respect, in this configuration, since the effect related to the specific effect is executed as the preliminary effect, the specific effect executed before and after the preliminary effect can be suitably connected by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

As the effect related to the specific effect, it is conceivable to remind (associate) the player with the specific effect. Specifically, those that display in common with the specific production (for example, characters that appear in the specific production also appear in the preliminary production) and those that have a common idea (for example, the specific production is a battle production). In this case, a notification suggesting the subsequent development, a notification for raising the expectation of the battle production, etc. are performed in the preliminary production).

Feature A5. When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an updating means (a function of executing a game number updating process by the main control device 101) for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game is provided. Prepare,
The specific means is for preventing the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the delay means executes the preliminary effect corresponding to a period in which the number of remaining games is not updated by the specific means.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is executed as much as the number of remaining games in the waiting period is not updated, the waiting period and the specific effect can be suitably synchronized while connecting (extending) the specific effect by the preliminary effect. ..

Feature A6. The specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses as the game is executed.
The specific effect executing means produces an effect that is a continuation of the specific effect executed before the execution of the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied after the preliminary effect is executed by the preliminary effect executing means. The gaming machine according to feature A4 or feature A5, characterized in that it is to be executed.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect is inserted into the specific effect, and the subsequent specific effect is restarted after the execution of the preliminary effect. That is, since the specific effect that should have been executed if the preliminary effect is not executed (if the predetermined condition is not satisfied) is executed after the preliminary effect is executed, it is the same as the case where the preliminary effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the flow of production up to the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to delay the execution timing of the specific notification while trying to match the case where the preliminary effect is executed and the case where the preliminary effect is not executed.

Further, for example, if the configuration is such that a dedicated effect different from the specific effect is executed after the preliminary effect is executed, setting processing for executing the dedicated effect is performed, and effect data for that purpose is prepared (video data and the like are stored). ) However, in this configuration, since the settings for the specific effect and the effect data can be diverted, it is possible to eliminate the need for the setting process for the dedicated effect and the preparation of the effect data. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress an increase in the processing load on the effect control and an increase in the amount of data.

Further, for example, if the configuration is such that a special effect different from the specific effect is executed after the preliminary effect is executed, a new measure is required as to what to do if the predetermined condition is satisfied again during the execution of the special effect. There is a risk. In this respect, with this configuration, it is possible to deal with it by inserting a preliminary effect each time, and it is possible to eliminate the need for new measures. That is, there is also an advantage that even when a predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, it can be flexibly dealt with.

Feature A7. Any of the features A4 to A6, wherein the preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing at least a part of the effect executed as a part of the specific effect as at least a part of the preliminary effect. The game machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, since at least a part of the effect executed as a part of the specific effect is used as at least a part of the preliminary effect, it is possible to execute the preliminary effect having a high relevance to the specific effect. Further, since the effect data for the specific effect can be utilized as the effect data for the preliminary effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the amount of data due to the preliminary effect.

Feature A8. As the specific effect, at least a first specific effect (first continuous effect) and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect (second continuous effect) are provided.
As the preliminary effect, at least the first preliminary effect corresponding to the first specific effect (the effect of the precursory preliminary scenario corresponding to the first continuous effect) and the first preliminary effect are different from each other and are the first. 2 There is a second preliminary production corresponding to a specific production (a production of this precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the second continuous production).
The preliminary effect executing means executes the first preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the first specific effect, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the second specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A7, characterized in that the second preliminary effect is executed.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect corresponding to the type of the specific effect being executed is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the preliminary effect is executed and fading the impression that the specific effect is being performed. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion. In addition, the configuration can be suitable for executing a preliminary effect that is highly related to the specific effect.

Feature A9. The specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses as the game is executed.
As the preliminary effect, a plurality of types of the preliminary effect (the effect of the precursory preliminary scenario) are provided.
Each of the preliminary productions has a production mode corresponding to the execution order of the productions (productions of this precursor scenario) executed in each game as the specific productions.
When the preliminary effect is executed in place of the predetermined effect (for example, the effect of the precursor scenario H-2) executed as the specific effect, the preliminary effect executing means corresponds to the execution order of the predetermined effect. Equipped with means for executing the preliminary effect (the effect of the present precursor scenario H-2) (the function of executing each effect of the present precursor scenario and the present precursor preliminary scenario based on the value of the continuous effect counter by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A8, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, a specific effect is configured so that the effect content progresses according to the execution of the game, but a plurality of specific effects are arranged so as to correspond to the execution order of each effect executed in order in the specific effect. There are different types of preliminary effects. Then, when the preliminary effect is executed during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order of the effect (predetermined effect) that was scheduled to be executed in the game if the predetermined condition is not satisfied is executed. Will be done. For example, if a standardized effect is executed regardless of which game during the specific effect is executed, the flow of the specific effect is hindered by the preliminary effect, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is a concern that it may be difficult to understand the content of the specific production. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since the preliminary effect of the content along the flow of the specific effect can be executed, it is possible to preferably suppress the flow of the specific effect from being obstructed by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or having difficulty understanding the content of the specific effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the effect due to the preliminary effect.

Feature A10. The specific effect executing means is characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the game after the preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order is executed, the specific effect is executed in the game. Described game machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect that should have been originally executed as the specific effect is executed after the execution of the preliminary effect. For example, in the case of a story-tailored specific effect, if a part of the specific effect is missing, the flow of the effect becomes difficult to understand, but according to this configuration, the lack of such an effect is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the flow of the effect up to the specific notification in the same manner as when the preliminary effect is not executed, and to match the effect when the preliminary effect is executed and when it is not executed. While trying, the execution timing of the specific notification can be delayed.

Feature A11. The preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (a function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A10.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, each time the waiting period is extended, the extension is filled with the preliminary effect. Therefore, it is possible to synchronize the waiting period and the specific effect with a simple configuration.

Feature A12. The preliminary effect executing means is a means for executing the preliminary effect in a game after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied and during the waiting period (for executing the continuous effect by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). The game machine according to any one of the features A4 to A11, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process).

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized, and the preliminary effect is executed later. This makes it possible to execute the preliminary effect at a well-separated place in the specific effect. Therefore, in the flow of the specific effect, the preliminary effect is executed at a halfway timing, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the effect from being obstructed.

Feature A13. The preliminary effect executing means is a grasping means for grasping the number of games whose waiting period is extended by the specific means (a function of executing the addition process of the preliminary effect counter by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). The means for executing the preliminary effect according to the number of games grasped by the grasping means in the game after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied and during the waiting period (corresponding to the second embodiment). The game machine according to feature A12, characterized in that it includes a function of executing preliminary effect processing by the display control device 81).

For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the progress of the specific effect may be frequently interrupted by the execution of the preliminary effect. In this respect, in this configuration, the extension of the standby effect that occurs during the specific effect is grasped, and the preliminary effect of the length corresponding to the extension is collectively executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the interruption of the specific effect due to the preliminary effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the difficulty in understanding the effect development from the player's point of view.

Feature A14. It is provided with a preliminary effect setting means (a function of setting the information of the precursor preliminary scenario in the scenario data table by the main control device 101) that performs the preliminary effect setting process based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the preliminary effect executing means executes the preliminary effect based on the setting result of the preliminary effect setting means.
The preliminary effect setting means is a means for executing the preliminary effect setting process in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed (one game in which the information of the present precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the second and subsequent games is continuously produced). The game machine according to any one of the features A4 to A13, which is characterized by having a function to be set at the start of the game.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect setting process is executed in the game before the game in which the preliminary effect is executed, the preliminary effect can be smoothly executed. Thereby, for example, even when the control process is in a high load state when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of process dropout.

In this feature, the feature that "the preliminary effect setting means performs the preliminary effect setting process in a game in which the specific effect setting process is performed by the specific effect setting means" may be further provided. In this case, the preliminary effect can be smoothly executed when the preliminary effect is executed in the second and subsequent games of the specific effect, and when the preliminary effect is executed in the start game (first game) of the specific effect. It is possible to execute the preliminary effect according to the setting.

In addition, in the configuration of the feature A8 that executes the type of preliminary effect corresponding to the type of the specific effect and the configuration of the feature A9 that executes the type of preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order, it depends on the timing of executing the preliminary effect. Since the preliminary effect to be executed changes, it is necessary to select a preliminary effect with the content suitable for each occasion, and there is a concern that the processing load and the risk of processing omission increase. By applying this feature to these configurations, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature A15. When a predetermined condition (winning a pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, a second specific effect (pseudo) is performed over a plurality of games. The second specific effect setting means (a function of executing the specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) for setting the execution of the continuous effect for the precursor), and
A second specific effect executing means (a function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means. When,
With
The preliminary effect executing means has any one of the features A4 to A14, which comprises means for not executing the preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the second specific effect. Described gaming machine.

In order to prevent the winning of the specific result from being immediately found at the time of executing the specific effect, the execution function of the specific effect (second specific effect) that does not presuppose the winning may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period. However, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period, the preliminary effect is executed in this configuration. It is configured not to. As a result, the frequency of setting and executing the preliminary effect can be kept low, and the load of the control process can be reduced.

Feature A16. When a predetermined condition (winning a pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, a second specific effect (pseudo) is performed over a plurality of games. The second specific effect setting means (a function of executing the specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) for setting the execution of the continuous effect for the precursor), and
A second specific effect executing means (a function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means. When,
With
The preparatory effect executing means according to any one of features A4 to A14, characterized in that the preparatory effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the second specific effect. Game machine.

In order to prevent the winning of the specific result from being immediately found at the time of executing the specific effect, the execution function of the specific effect (second specific effect) that does not presuppose the winning may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period, but even if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period, the preliminary effect is provided in this configuration. It is configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning of the specific result from being determined in advance depending on the presence or absence of the preliminary effect, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the end of the specific effect for a long time.

Feature A17. The first device (main control device 101) and
A second device (display control device 81) that is electrically connected to the first device and operates based on a signal from the first device.
With
The first device is
At least, the special determination means, the waiting period setting means, the special state transition means, and the specific means are provided.
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an updating means (a function of executing a game number updating process by the main control device 101) for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game is provided. Prepare,
The specific means is for preventing the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The second device includes the specific effect setting means, the specific effect executing means, and the delay means.
The first device is a first signal (precursor game number update command, CZ game number update command) corresponding to execution of update of the remaining game number by the update means, or the remaining game by the update means. It is equipped with an output means (a function to execute command output processing by the main controller 101) that outputs a second signal (precursor game number non-update command, CZ game number non-update command) corresponding to the fact that the number update is not executed.
The second device is a grasping means (display control device) for grasping that the first signal is not output by the output means or the update of the remaining number of games is not executed based on the output of the second signal. Equipped with a function to execute continuous production execution processing by 81)
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the delay means delays the execution game based on the grasping result of the grasping means.

In the above configuration, since the first device and the second device having the first device as a higher-level device are provided and the control processing related to the game effect is entrusted to the second device, the processing load of the first device is reduced. Becomes possible. However, since the number of remaining games in the waiting period is managed on the first device side, there is a possibility that there may be a discrepancy in the recognition of the number of remaining games between the first device and the second device. There is a concern that the execution game of the specific notification cannot be delayed appropriately. In this regard, in this configuration, the first signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has been updated or the second signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has not been updated is directed from the first device to the second device. It is configured to output. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied and the number of remaining games in the waiting period is not updated, the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. Therefore, on the second device side, it is possible to grasp whether or not the number of games remaining in the standby period has been updated in the first device by referring to whether the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the recognition of the number of remaining games, and even if the processing is shared between the first device and the second device, the specific notification execution game can be played for the extension of the waiting period. It will be possible to delay appropriately.

In this feature, "at least one of the first signal and the second signal includes the information on the number of remaining games, or the output means is a means for outputting the third signal including the information on the number of remaining games. It may further have a configuration of "providing". According to this configuration, even if there is a discrepancy, the deviation can be corrected in the second device based on the first signal, the second signal, or the third signal.

Feature A18. When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the number of remaining games in the waiting period is updated based on the game being started with the number of bets set to the first number (3). Equipped with an update means (a function of executing a game number update process by the main control device 101)
The specific means is for preventing the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The predetermined condition is described in any one of the features A1 to A17, wherein the game is started in a state where the number of bets is a second number (2) different from the first number. Game machine.

In this configuration, the waiting period may or may not be extended depending on the number of bets when playing the game. For example, in a situation where a player is putting in a game medium by maintenance, he intends to put in the first number of game media and start the game, but unintentionally starts the game by putting in the second number. It can often happen. In this case, it is conceivable to alert the player to prevent the game from starting in the second number, but this may distract the player and make it difficult to concentrate on the specific production. is there. In this respect, in this configuration, any configuration of the above features A1 to A16 is applied to the extension of the waiting period based on the operation of such a player, and the game machine side takes measures. As a result, the player's operation error (mistake in the number of bets) is allowed, and as a result, the player can enjoy the specific effect without worrying about the number of bets.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A18, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Special whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the trigger of the transition lottery) Special determination means for executing determination (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101),
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, transformation success effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, management of the number of second games) that can set a waiting period (precursor mode, CZ mode) so that at least one of (Function to execute processing (processing to set CZ counter)) and
When the waiting period has elapsed, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the AT mode transition trigger) is satisfied after the waiting period has elapsed, the special state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special state. (A function to execute the winning result handling process by the main control device 101)
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the specific effect setting means (display control) for setting the specific effect (continuous effect) executed over a plurality of games to be executed in the waiting period. (A function to execute continuous effect setting processing by the device 81) and
The specific effect executing means (display control) for executing the specific effect on the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table). (A function to execute the continuous effect execution process by the device 81) and
At least when a predetermined condition (the game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is specified to be longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means. Means (a function of executing a game number update process (a function that does not update the precursor counter and the CZ counter in the case of a 2-bet game) by the main control device 101) and
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect execution means (continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81, continuous) for executing the preliminary effect (effect of the present precursor preliminary scenario) related to the specific effect. Function to execute the production execution process) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when the judgment result of the special judgment based on the establishment of the predetermined judgment opportunity becomes a specific result, at least one of the transition to a special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification that the specific result is won is provided. The waiting period to be waited for is set. In this waiting period, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games in response to winning the specific result. Then, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the lapse of the waiting period or after the lapse of the waiting period, the gaming state is shifted to the special state. That is, after the player is notified of the winning of the specific result by the above-mentioned specific effect, the game state is changed to a special state or a state in which the game state can be changed (a state in which the state is changed when the transition condition is satisfied). ..

Here, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied at least during the execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is extended and the end game of the period is delayed. On the other hand, since the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, the timing of the winning notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are different. For this reason, even though the winning notification has been given, there may be an inconvenience that the player does not easily shift to the special state, and there is a concern that the player's trust in the production may be reduced. In this respect, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect is executed instead of the specific effect, so that the winning notification in the specific effect is delayed by that amount. That is, since the timing of the winning notification can be delayed according to the extension of the waiting period, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the waiting period and the specific effect. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

At this time, for example, if the configuration is such that an effect unrelated to the specific effect is executed as a preliminary effect, the player may be given the impression that the specific effect has suddenly ended. Especially for the player who was watching the specific production while expecting the winning, it may give the impression that the winning has disappeared, and there is a concern that the player may be confused. In this respect, in this configuration, since the effect related to the specific effect is executed as the preliminary effect, the specific effect executed before and after the preliminary effect can be suitably connected by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

As the effect related to the specific effect, it is conceivable to remind (associate) the player with the specific effect. Specifically, those that display in common with the specific production (for example, characters that appear in the specific production also appear in the preliminary production) and those that have a common idea (for example, the specific production is a battle production). In this case, a notification suggesting the subsequent development, a notification for raising the expectation of the battle production, etc. are performed in the preliminary production).

Further, in this feature, as a precondition configuration, "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a symbol (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the symbol is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied". Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R area visible through 26L, 26M, 26L) is provided, variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. Is a game machine in which the game is played as one game when the game is stopped. ”

Feature B2. As the specific effect, at least a first specific effect (first continuous effect) and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect (second continuous effect) are provided.
As the preliminary effect, at least the first preliminary effect corresponding to the first specific effect (the effect of the precursory preliminary scenario corresponding to the first continuous effect) and the first preliminary effect are different from each other and are the first. 2 There is a second preliminary production corresponding to a specific production (a production of this precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the second continuous production).
The preliminary effect executing means executes the first preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the first specific effect, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the second specific effect. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the second preliminary effect is executed.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect corresponding to the type of the specific effect being executed is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the preliminary effect is executed and fading the impression that the specific effect is being performed. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

Feature B3. The specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses as the game is executed.
As the preliminary effect, a plurality of types of the preliminary effect (the effect of the precursory preliminary scenario) are provided.
Each of the preliminary productions has a production mode corresponding to the execution order of the productions (productions of this precursor scenario) executed in each game as the specific productions.
When the preliminary effect is executed in place of the predetermined effect (for example, the effect of the precursor scenario H-2) executed as the specific effect, the preliminary effect executing means corresponds to the execution order of the predetermined effect. Equipped with means for executing the preliminary effect (the effect of the present precursor scenario H-2) (the function of executing each effect of the present precursor scenario and the present precursor preliminary scenario based on the value of the continuous effect counter by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that it is present.

In the above configuration, a specific effect is configured so that the effect content progresses according to the execution of the game, but a plurality of specific effects are arranged so as to correspond to the execution order of each effect executed in order in the specific effect. There are different types of preliminary effects. Then, when the preliminary effect is executed during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order of the effect (predetermined effect) that was scheduled to be executed in the game if the predetermined condition is not satisfied is executed. Will be done. For example, if a standardized effect is executed regardless of which game during the specific effect is executed, the flow of the specific effect is hindered by the preliminary effect, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is a concern that it may be difficult to understand the content of the specific production. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since the preliminary effect of the content along the flow of the specific effect can be executed, it is possible to preferably suppress the flow of the specific effect from being obstructed by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or having difficulty understanding the content of the specific effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the effect due to the preliminary effect.

Feature B4. Preliminary effect setting means (mainly) for setting the preliminary effect according to the number of executed games (continuous effect counter) since the specific effect is started, the progress of the specific effect, or the effect information of each game in the specific effect. The control device 101 has a function to set the information of this precursor preliminary scenario in the scenario data table).
The preliminary effect executing means is characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect is executed based on the setting result of the preliminary effect setting means. The gaming machine described in any of B3.

In the above configuration, apart from the specific effect, a preliminary effect is set according to the number of games executed since the start of the specific effect, the progress of the specific effect, or the effect information of each game in the specific effect. According to this configuration, for example, when executing a preliminary effect in the second game after the specific effect is started, it is easy to perform the preliminary effect corresponding to the effect that should have been executed in the second game as the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute a preliminary effect corresponding to the effect of each game in the specific effect.

Feature B5. It is provided with a preliminary effect setting means (a function of setting the information of the precursor preliminary scenario in the scenario data table by the main control device 101) that performs the preliminary effect setting process based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect executing means executes the preliminary effect based on the setting result of the preliminary effect setting means.
The preliminary effect setting means is a means for executing the preliminary effect setting process in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed (one game of continuous production of information on the precursory preliminary scenario corresponding to the second and subsequent games). The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it has a function to be set at the start of the game.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect setting process is executed in the game before the game in which the preliminary effect is executed, the preliminary effect can be smoothly executed. Thereby, for example, even when the control process is in a high load state when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of process dropout.

In addition, in the configuration of the feature B2 that executes the type of preliminary effect corresponding to the type of the specific effect and the configuration of the feature B3 that executes the type of preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order, it depends on the timing of executing the preliminary effect. Since the preliminary effect to be executed changes, it is necessary to select a preliminary effect with contents suitable for each occasion, and there is a concern that the processing load and the risk of processing omission increase. By applying this feature to these configurations, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the preliminary effect setting means performs the preliminary effect setting process in a game in which the specific effect setting process is performed by the specific effect setting means.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is set according to the setting of the specific effect, the preliminary effect can be smoothly executed when the preliminary effect is executed in the second and subsequent games of the specific effect, and the specific effect can be executed smoothly. Even when the preliminary effect is executed in the start game (first game) of, the preliminary effect can be executed according to the setting.

Feature B7. The preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (a function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the first embodiment). The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, each time the waiting period is extended, the extension is filled with the preliminary effect. This makes it possible to execute the preliminary effect at a well-separated place in the specific effect. Therefore, in the flow of the specific effect, the preliminary effect is executed at a halfway timing, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the effect from being obstructed.

Feature B8. The preliminary effect executing means is a means for executing the preliminary effect in a game after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied and during the waiting period (for executing the continuous effect by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

In the above configuration, in a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized, and the preliminary effect is executed later. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preliminary effect from being executed at a halfway stage and the progress of the specific effect from being interrupted.

Feature B9. The preliminary effect executing means is a grasping means for grasping the number of games whose waiting period is extended by the specific means (a function of executing the addition process of the preliminary effect counter by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). The means for executing the preliminary effect for the number of games grasped by the grasping means in the game after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied and during the waiting period (corresponding to the second embodiment). The game machine according to feature B8, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing preliminary effect processing by the display control device 81).

For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the progress of the specific effect may be frequently interrupted by the execution of the preliminary effect. In this respect, in this configuration, the extension of the standby effect that occurs during the specific effect is grasped, and the preliminary effect of the length corresponding to the extension is collectively executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the interruption of the specific effect due to the preliminary effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the difficulty in understanding the effect development from the player's point of view.

Feature B10. The preliminary effect executing means is
A first means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A second means of executing the preliminary effect in a game after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied and during the waiting period, and
With
When the situation when the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first situation, the preliminary effect is executed by the first means, and the situation when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a second situation different from the first situation. In the case, the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the preliminary effect is executed by the second means.

In the above configuration, it is switched depending on the situation whether the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied or the preliminary effect is executed after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, if switching is performed according to the progress of a specific effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a preliminary effect is executed if the timing is good in the effect, and a specific effect is executed if the timing is bad. Can be used properly by continuing to postpone the preliminary production. Further, the above switching may be performed depending on the type of the specific effect, or the above switching may be performed according to the number of games from the start of the specific effect.

Feature B11. When the effect executed as the specific effect is the first effect in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the preliminary effect executing means executes the preliminary effect by the first means, and the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. The game machine according to feature B10, wherein when the effect executed as the specific effect is a second effect different from the first effect, the preliminary effect is executed by the second means.

According to the above configuration, the above switching can be performed according to the progress of the specific effect. For this reason, it is possible to properly use whether to execute the preliminary effect immediately or to wait until a good break in the effect before performing the preliminary effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the effect of the specific effect due to the preliminary effect. It becomes.

Feature B 12.1 The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the preliminary effect for one game has a smaller data capacity than the effect for one game in the specific effect.

In the above configuration, since the data for the preliminary effect is kept small, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data. Preliminary effects are preliminary effects when the waiting period is extended and are basically not executed. By keeping the data of such effects small, the original specific effect data and other effects can be obtained. It is possible to suppress the pressure on the storage area of the production data. In addition, by reducing the data capacity of the preliminary effect, it becomes possible to read it in a short time, which is a preferable mode in terms of the nature of the preliminary effect, which is executed in a hurry when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. Become.

Feature B13. When a predetermined condition (winning a pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, the second specific effect is executed over a plurality of games. The second specific effect setting means (a function of executing the specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) and
A second specific effect executing means (a function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means. When,
With
The preliminary effect executing means has any one of features B1 to B12, which comprises means for not executing the preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the second specific effect. The game machine described.

In order to prevent the winning of the specific result from being immediately found at the time of executing the specific effect, the execution function of the specific effect (second specific effect) that does not presuppose the winning may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period. However, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period, the preliminary effect is executed in this configuration. It is configured not to. As a result, the frequency of setting and executing the preliminary effect can be kept low, and the load of the control process can be reduced.

Feature B14. When a predetermined condition (winning a pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, the second specific effect is executed over a plurality of games. The second specific effect setting means (a function of executing the specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) and
A second specific effect executing means (a function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81) that executes the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means. When,
With
The preparatory effect executing means according to any one of features B1 to B12, characterized in that the preparatory effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the second specific effect. Game machine.

In order to prevent the winning of the specific result from being immediately found at the time of executing the specific effect, the execution function of the specific effect (second specific effect) that does not presuppose the winning may be provided. This second specific effect is executed regardless of the waiting period, but even if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect that is not affected by such a waiting period, the preliminary effect is provided in this configuration. It is configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning of the specific result from being determined in advance depending on the presence or absence of the preliminary effect, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the end of the specific effect for a long time.

Feature B15. The first device (main control device 101) and
A second device (display control device 81) that is electrically connected to the first device and operates based on a signal from the first device.
With
The first device is
At least, the special determination means, the waiting period setting means, the special state transition means, and the specific means are provided.
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an updating means (a function of executing a game number updating process by the main control device 101) for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game is provided. Prepare,
The specific means is for preventing the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The second device includes the specific effect setting means, the specific effect executing means, and the preliminary effect executing means.
The first device is a first signal (precursor game number update command, CZ game number update command) corresponding to execution of update of the remaining game number by the update means, or the remaining game by the update means. It is equipped with an output means (a function to execute command output processing by the main controller 101) that outputs a second signal (precursor game number non-update command, CZ game number non-update command) corresponding to the fact that the number update is not executed.
The second device is a grasping means (display control device) for grasping that the first signal is not output by the output means or the update of the remaining number of games is not executed based on the output of the second signal. Equipped with a function to execute continuous production execution processing by 81)
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the preliminary effect executing means executes the preliminary effect based on the grasping result of the grasping means.

In the above configuration, since the first device and the second device having the first device as a higher-level device are provided and the control processing related to the game effect is entrusted to the second device, the processing load of the first device is reduced. Becomes possible. However, since the number of remaining games in the waiting period is managed on the first device side, there is a possibility that there may be a discrepancy in the recognition of the number of remaining games between the first device and the second device. There is a concern that the preliminary production cannot be performed properly. In this regard, in this configuration, the first signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has been updated or the second signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has not been updated is directed from the first device to the second device. It is configured to output. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied and the number of remaining games in the waiting period is not updated, the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. Therefore, on the second device side, it is possible to grasp whether or not the number of games remaining in the standby period has been updated in the first device by referring to whether the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. it can. As a result, it is suppressed that there is a discrepancy in the recognition of the number of remaining games, and even if the processing is shared between the first device and the second device, the preliminary effect is appropriately executed for the extension of the waiting period. It becomes possible to do.

In this feature, "at least one of the first signal and the second signal includes the information on the number of remaining games, or the output means is a means for outputting the third signal including the information on the number of remaining games. It may further have a configuration of "providing". According to this configuration, even if there is a discrepancy, the deviation can be corrected in the second device based on the first signal, the second signal, or the third signal.

Feature B16. When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the number of remaining games in the waiting period is updated based on the game being started with the number of bets set to the first number (3). Equipped with an update means (a function of executing a game number update process by the main control device 101)
The specific means is for preventing the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The predetermined condition is described in any one of features B1 to B15, wherein the game is started in a state where the number of bets is a second number (2) different from the first number. Game machine.

In this configuration, the waiting period may or may not be extended depending on the number of bets when playing the game. For example, in a situation where a player is putting in a game medium by maintenance, he intends to put in the first number of game media and start the game, but unintentionally starts the game by putting in the second number. It can often happen. In this case, it is conceivable to alert the player to prevent the game from starting in the second number, but this may distract the player and make it difficult to concentrate on the specific production. is there. In this respect, in this configuration, any configuration of the above features B1 to B15 is applied to the extension of the waiting period based on the operation of such a player, and the game machine side takes measures. As a result, the player's operation error (mistake in the number of bets) is allowed, and as a result, the player can enjoy the specific effect without worrying about the number of bets.

For each configuration of the above features B1 to B16, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A pattern (design) is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of variable display areas (display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied are visible. Reel 32L, 32M, 32R area) and
The first opportunity (winning the pseudo-precursor execution lottery in the first and second embodiments, the CZ mode lottery, the AT mode lottery, and the AT mode game number addition lottery in the third to fifth embodiments) Winning the second opportunity (in the first and second embodiments, the CZ mode lottery, the AT mode lottery, and the AT mode game number addition lottery), which is different from the case where the first opportunity is established. In each of the cases where the pseudo-precursor execution lottery was won in the third to fifth embodiments), the specific effect (continuous effect) is executed by the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65). Specific effect execution means (function for executing continuous effect setting process, specific combination notification process, continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81),
With
The specific effect is executed over a period in which the game in which the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and then the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas is performed a plurality of times. Is to be done
The specific effect executing means is
Predetermined conditions during execution of the specific effect (when the game shifts to the second BB state in the first and second embodiments, and the game is started with the number of bets set to 2 in the third to fifth embodiments) When is satisfied, the continuation determination means for determining whether or not to continue the specific effect being executed (a function of executing the bonus intermediate effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the first and second embodiments). , A function of executing the continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the third to fifth embodiments), and
When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect, the first means for continuing the specific effect during execution (for pseudo precursors in the first and second embodiments). A function to continue the continuous effect when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect of, and when the 2-bet game is started during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor in the third to fifth embodiments. (Function to continue continuous production) and
When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to not continuing the specific effect, the second means (in the first and second embodiments, the present embodiment) for suspending or interrupting the specific effect being executed. A function to stop the continuous effect when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the precursor, and in the third to fifth embodiments, the two-bet game is started during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor. Function to cancel continuous production when
With
When the specific effect being executed is executed based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the continuation determination means determines that the specific effect is to be continued, and the specific effect being executed is the first. When the execution is based on the establishment of the two triggers, the means for determining that the specific effect is not continued (the function of executing the process of step S2701 by the display control device 81 in the first and second embodiments). A gaming machine comprising the function of executing the process of step S3202 by the display control device 81 in the third to fifth embodiments).

In the above configuration, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games in each of the case where the first opportunity is established and the case where the second opportunity is established. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect is continued if the specific effect is based on the establishment of the first opportunity, and the specific effect is continued if the specific effect is based on the establishment of the second opportunity. Is suspended or interrupted. Therefore, it is possible for the player to determine which of the first and second triggers has been established, depending on whether or not the specific effect is continued when the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, in addition to enjoying the development of the specific effect, it is possible to provide a new game in which the user enjoys whether or not the specific effect continues, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. Special whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the trigger of the transition lottery) Special determination means for executing determination (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101),
After the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the predetermined transition conditions (the number of remaining games in the precursor mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0). When it becomes 0 and wins the AT mode transition trigger), the special state transition means (function to execute the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift the game state to the special state, and
With
The first opportunity is that a predetermined specific condition (winning in the pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state.
The second opportunity is to win the lottery for adding the number of games in the predetermined execution conditions (CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) based on the determination result of the special determination becoming the specific result or the specific result. The game machine according to the feature C1, which is characterized in that the execution lottery for the continuous production for the present precursor, which is performed based on the above, is established.

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination opportunity becomes a specific result, the gaming state shifts to the special state or becomes a transitionable state (a state of transitioning due to the establishment of the transition condition). .. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific effect triggered by the fact that the judgment result of the special judgment becomes a specific result or the predetermined execution condition based on the specific result is satisfied (second trigger). , If the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific effect due to an opportunity (first opportunity) that is not based on winning the specific result, the specific effect is continued as it is. Therefore, if the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, the specific result is won, and if the specific effect is continued, the player can determine that the specific effect is not won. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the success or failure can be known depending on whether or not the specific effect is continued without waiting for the end of the specific effect.

Feature C3. When the determination result of the special determination is the specific result, at least one of the specific notifications corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result is waited for for a plurality of games. Standby period setting means that can set the period (precursor mode, CZ mode) (function to execute precursor mode setting process, second game number management process (process to set CZ counter) by the main control device 101),
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an updating means for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game (a function of executing the game number updating process by the main control device 101) ,
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger is won). ) Is established, the special game state transition means (function of executing the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the special state,
With
When a predetermined event (establishment of the second BB prize) occurs, the specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the update of the remaining number of games by the update means is not executed over a plurality of games is specified. Equipped with a state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101)
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined event occurs or the state shifts to the specific state.

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result, a waiting period is set, and the winning notification and the transition to the special state are waited until the waiting period elapses. As a result, an effect period from winning a specific result to notification of winning or transition to special information is secured, and the specific effect can be executed using the period. Further, in this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the game shifts to a specific state in which the number of remaining games in the waiting period is not updated over a plurality of games. Therefore, if the game shifts to a specific state during execution of a specific effect based on winning a specific result, the end game of the waiting period will be significantly delayed. In this case, it is conceivable to lengthen the specific effect by the amount of the specific state, but since the execution period of the specific state itself is long, it gives the player an impression of being delayed, which is not preferable. Further, although it is conceivable to fill in the holes with an effect different from the specific effect, it is necessary to create an effect necessary for that, which may increase the burden on the game machine design. In this regard, in this configuration, if the specific effect is transferred to the specific state during the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the specific result, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted. Therefore, consideration is given to the delay in the waiting period due to the transition to the specific state. It can be made unnecessary. On the other hand, in the case of a specific production that is not based on winning a specific result, it is not affected by the waiting period, so there is no problem even if the specific production is continued if a transition to a specific state occurs in the middle of the process. .. That is, according to this configuration, in providing a game in which the success or failure can be known depending on whether or not the specific effect is continued, it can be a preferable mode from the viewpoint of the waiting period.

Feature C4. When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means, after the end of the specific state, the third means (in the first and second embodiments) for executing the specific effect during the remaining waiting period. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S2201, step S2215, and steps S2207 to S2212 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is executed after the end of the specific state, the player can be appropriately notified of the winning even when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special state from being performed in a state where it is not clear whether or not the specific result has been won. Further, in the above case, since the specific effect is executed in the remaining waiting period after the end of the specific state, it is possible to preferably synchronize the waiting period and the specific effect.

Feature C5. The second means interrupts the executing specific effect when the determination result of the continuation determination means corresponds to the result of not continuing the specific effect.
The third means is characterized in that, when the specific effect is interrupted by the second means, after the specific state ends, the means for resuming the continuation of the interrupted specific effect is provided. The gaming machine described in C4.

In the above configuration, since the continuation of the interrupted specific effect is resumed after the end of the specific state, the winning notification can be performed by the specific effect at the time of resumption. In addition, since it is avoided that the specific effect ends in the middle of the process, for example, when the specific effect is a highly rare specific effect with a low execution frequency such as a premium effect, the specific effect is given to the player until the end. It will be possible to show.

Feature C6. When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to not continuing the specific effect, the second means cancels the executing specific effect.
The third means is a means (first) for executing a new specific effect according to the number of remaining games in the waiting period after the specific state is terminated when the specific effect is stopped by the second means. The gaming machine according to feature C4 or feature C5, wherein the display control device 81 includes steps S2201, step S2215, and steps S2207 to S2212) in the second embodiment. ..

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is canceled by the second means, the specific effect is executed again after the end of the specific state, so that the winning notification can be performed by the specific effect. At that time, since a new specific effect is executed according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state, it is possible to preferably synchronize the new specific effect with the waiting period.

Feature C7. The specific effect executing means includes a third means for executing the specific effect after the execution of the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the second means.
The third means starts the specific effect before the end of the specific state, and executes the specific effect straddling after the end of the specific state (steps S4001 to 8 by the display control device 81 in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C6, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S4008).

Depending on the timing of transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state may be small. In this case, it may be difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that the processing load required for switching will increase and the burden at the time of design due to the creation of the dedicated effect will increase. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific effect is started prior to the end of the specific state, it is possible to secure the number of games for executing the specific effect even when the number of remaining games in the waiting period is small. As a result, after being canceled or interrupted, while appropriately suppressing the inability to properly execute the specific effect due to the shortage of the number of games, the increase in the processing load due to the dedicated effect, and the increase in the burden at the time of design. It becomes possible to execute a specific effect of.

Feature C8. The third means is means for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state (step S4001 by the display control device 81) when the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state is a predetermined number or less. The gaming machine according to the feature C7, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

In the above configuration, whether or not to start the specific state before the end of the specific state is switched according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the waiting period is large, and the specific effect being unnecessarily lengthened to give the player a feeling of delay.

In addition, this feature further includes a configuration that "when the number of remaining games in the waiting period grasped by the remaining number of games grasping means is larger than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the end of the specific state". May be good.

Feature C9. A special determination means (main control device) that executes a special determination as to whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity. (Function to execute AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by 101) and
After the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the predetermined transition conditions (the number of remaining games in the precursor mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0). When it becomes 0 and wins the AT mode transition trigger), the special state transition means (function to execute the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift the game state to the special state, and
With
The first opportunity is to win the lottery for adding the number of games in the predetermined execution conditions (CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) based on the determination result of the special determination becoming the specific result or the specific result. (Winning the lottery for the execution of the continuous production for this precursor) will be established.
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the second opportunity is that a predetermined specific condition (winning in a pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state.

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination opportunity becomes a specific result, the gaming state shifts to the special state or becomes a transitionable state (a state of transitioning due to the establishment of the transition condition). .. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific effect triggered by the fact that the judgment result of the special determination becomes a specific result or the predetermined execution condition based on the specific result is satisfied (first trigger). , The specific effect is continued as it is, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific effect due to an opportunity (second opportunity) that is not based on winning the specific result, the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted. Therefore, by continuing the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can determine that the specific result has been won, and it depends on whether or not the specific effect is continued without waiting for the end of the specific effect. It becomes possible to provide a game that can know the success or failure. In addition, being able to know the winning in advance makes it possible to provide a way of enjoying watching the remaining specific effects while feeling relieved and feeling superior.

Feature C10. The predetermined condition is not satisfied when the game is started with the number of bets set to the first number (3), and the number of bets is set to the second number (2) different from the first number. The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the game is established when the game is started in the state of being in the state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to satisfy a predetermined condition by a simple operation of changing the number of bets, and it is a preferable mode in providing a game in which it is possible to know whether or not a specific effect is continued. it can.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the predetermined condition can be satisfied based on the operation of the player.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined condition can be satisfied by the player's will. Therefore, it is possible for the player to establish the predetermined condition at the timing when he / she wants to satisfy the predetermined condition, and it can be a preferable mode in providing a game in which the success or failure can be known depending on whether or not the specific effect is continued. Further, since the player can select whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, the configuration can be convenient for the player who does not want to know the result in advance.

For each configuration of the above features C1 to C11, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A pattern (design) is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied, and a plurality of variable display areas (display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied are visible. Reel 32L, 32M, 32R area) and
Specific opportunity (CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, winning the AT mode game number addition lottery, CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, AT mode game number addition lottery in the first to fifth embodiments) If the continuous effect execution lottery is won), the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas. Specific effect setting means (a function of executing the continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) for setting the specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over a period in which the game is performed a plurality of times, and
Execution of the continuous effect execution process by the specific effect executing means (display control device 81) so that the specific effect is executed by the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means. Function to do) and
In a game machine equipped with
The game machine has a configuration capable of executing a first game (3-bet game) corresponding to the fulfillment of the first condition by satisfying the first condition (the game is started with the number of bets set to 3). Yes, by establishing a second condition (second BB winning in a 2-bet game) different from the first condition, the second game (bonus game in the second BB state) corresponding to the establishment of the second condition can be executed. It is a possible configuration,
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed when the specific opportunity is established in the situation where the game of the first condition is performed (step S601 by the main control device 101). A function to execute the process of step S602, the AT lottery process, the AT addition process, and the precursor mode setting process (in the case of a 3-bet game, the AT lottery process is executed, and the number of AT mode, CZ mode, and AT mode games is added. (A function to set a precursor start command), a function to execute a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81 (a function to execute a continuous effect setting process when a precursor start command is received, a display control device 81). (Function to execute the process for notifying the specific role))
The second condition is satisfied after the setting of the specific effect by the first means, and the second game corresponding to the establishment of the second condition is executed during the execution of the specific effect set by the first means. In this case, the second means for canceling or interrupting the specific effect being executed (for the present precursor when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor in the first to fifth embodiments). A game machine that is characterized by having a function to cancel the continuous production of.

In the above configuration, when a specific opportunity is established, a specific effect is executed over a plurality of games. Then, when the specific effect is executed based on the specific opportunity established in the state where the game of the first condition is performed, and the second game corresponding to the establishment of the second condition is executed during the execution. The above-mentioned specific effect is canceled or interrupted. For example, if the specific effect is continuously executed during the second game, it may not be clear whether the game of the first condition is being executed or the game of the second condition is being executed. There is a concern that the player may be confused by misunderstanding that the game under one condition is being executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress such confusion of the player, and it is possible to make the configuration easy to play.

Feature D2. When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during the execution of the specific effect set by the first means, the first after the cancellation or interruption. In the two games, means for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the second game and different from the specific effect (execution of the continuous effect for the present precursor in the first and second embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it has a function of executing a bonus effect during the transition period of the second BB state when the game shifts to the second BB state.

In the above configuration, when the second game is executed during the execution of the specific effect based on the specific opportunity established in the game of the first condition, the predetermined effect corresponding to the second game is executed instead of the specific effect. As a result, it is clarified that the game is the second game, and it becomes possible to more preferably suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature D3. A special determination means (for a 3-bet game) that executes a special determination as to whether or not a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode) advantageous to the player is generated based on the establishment of the first condition. In some cases, it has a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT addition processing).
The specific trigger is a specific result (winning in addition to the number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) corresponding to the determination result of the special determination causing the special state, or the determination of the special determination. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein when the result is the specific result, the winning state is obtained by a predetermined lottery process (execution lottery for continuous production).

In the above configuration, the specific effect based on the specific opportunity established in the game of the first condition is executed based on the winning of the specific result or the winning in the predetermined lottery process executed based on the winning. In some cases, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted as the second game is executed during the execution. Therefore, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the specific result has been won depending on whether or not the specific effect is canceled or interrupted when the second game is executed. As a result, it is possible not only to know the success or failure by the ending of the specific production, but also to provide a fun way of determining the success or failure by executing the second game in the middle of the specific production.

Feature D4. Even if the determination result of the special determination is the specific result, the transition to the special state is impossible at least during the execution period of the second game.
When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during the execution of the specific effect set by the first means, the first after the cancellation or interruption. In the two games, a third means (fourth implementation) of executing a predetermined effect (continuous effect for pseudo precursors) in which a predetermined notification (defeat effect, success / failure effect) corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result is performed. The game machine according to feature D3, wherein the display control device 81 is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S3301 to S3308).

In the above configuration, when a specific result is won, a specific effect for notifying the winning is executed. However, since it is not possible to shift to the special state during the execution of the second game, if the second game is executed during the execution of the specific effect, it is special for at least the execution period of the second game. The transition to the state will be delayed. As a result, there is an inconvenience that the special state does not easily occur even though the winning notification is performed in the specific effect. In this respect, in this configuration, in the second game started during the execution of the specific effect, the predetermined effect for executing the predetermined notification corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result is executed. That is, since the effect mode is changed so that the off notification is performed instead of the winning notification, the effect contradiction does not occur even if the period of not shifting to the special state continues after the end of the effect. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, and it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the player's trust in the effect.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the predetermined effect is executed as a continuation effect of the specific effect canceled or interrupted by the second means.

In the above configuration, since the predetermined effect is executed as a continuation of the specific effect in which the predetermined effect is canceled or interrupted, it can be seen from the player's point of view that the effect is switched to the effect for the predetermined notification (disengagement notification) in the middle of the specific effect. It can be made difficult. As a result, it is possible to more preferably ensure consistency with the occurrence of a period during which the special state does not occur after the end of the production.

Feature D6. If a predetermined specific condition (winning a pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the specific result is not won, the second specific effect (continuous effect for pseudo-precursor) is performed over a plurality of games. The second specific effect setting means (a function of executing the specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) to be set to be performed, and
The second specific effect executing means (process for executing continuous effect by the display control device 81) that causes the second specific effect to be executed by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means. Function to execute) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5, wherein the third means includes means for executing a part of the second specific effect as the predetermined notification or the predetermined effect.

In the above configuration, the second specific effect for disengagement notification is executed in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state. Then, when the predetermined effect is executed when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, a part of the second specific effect is diverted as the predetermined notification or the predetermined effect. For this reason, it is possible to reasonably connect the specific effect before the cancellation or interruption and the predetermined effect after the cancellation or interruption, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the effect is switched to the effect for notification of disconnection in the middle of the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably ensure consistency with the fact that there is a period during which the special state does not occur after the end of the production. Moreover, since a part of the second specific effect is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect as a predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated effect, and it is also possible to save the capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data.

Feature D7. The specific effect setting means includes a game number setting means for setting the number of games to be executed of the specific effect.
When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during the execution of the specific effect set by the first means, the number of remaining games of the specific effect. Equipped with a grasping means to grasp
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, wherein the third means does not execute the predetermined effect when the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games.

If the specific effect is advanced to some extent, the player may generally determine the hit. If such a player switches to a predetermined effect for notification of a miss when the hit is almost known, there is a concern that the player may be disliked and the interest in the specific effect may be reduced. In this respect, in this configuration, when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, the number of remaining games is grasped as the progress of the specific effect, and when the grasped number of remaining games is less than or equal to the predetermined number, the predetermined effect is executed. It is configured not to. In other words, instead of uniformly executing the predetermined effect, it is used properly whether or not to execute the predetermined effect according to the number of remaining games, so that the off notification is executed with the player almost knowing the hit. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest in a specific effect due to switching to a predetermined effect.

Feature D8. As the specific effect, at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect are provided.
When the second game is executed during the execution of the first specific effect, the second means cancels or interrupts the executing of the first specific effect, and the second means stops or interrupts the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific effect is executed during the execution of the second specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, which comprises means for continuing the second specific effect even after the start of the second game when the second game is executed.

In the above configuration, when the second game is executed during the execution of the specific effect, whether the specific effect is stopped or interrupted or continued is switched depending on the type of the specific effect. Therefore, for example, when a specific effect having a low frequency of execution such as a premium effect and having a high value for the player is executed, the specific effect can be continued even if the second game is executed.

In this feature, "the second specific effect is executed less frequently than the first specific effect" or "the second specific effect has a longer number of executed games than the first specific effect". There may be a further configuration of "yes".

Feature D9. When the specific trigger is established, a notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification different from the specific effect (such as the establishment of the execution trigger of the continuous effect or the notification suggesting that the continuous effect is being executed). With
When the second game is executed during the execution of the specific notification and the specific effect, the specific effect being executed can be stopped or interrupted by the second means, while the specific notification can be continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

In the above configuration, when a specific opportunity is established, a specific notification is executed separately from the specific effect. Then, when the second game is executed during the execution of the specific notification and the specific effect, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, while the specific notification is continued. Therefore, even if the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, it is possible to know that the specific result is actually won by seeing the specific notification, and the game after the cancellation or interruption is expected. Will be possible.

In this feature, the "specific notification different from the specific effect" is "a specific notification different from the specific effect and corresponding to the establishment of the specific opportunity" or "a different notification from the specific effect". Therefore, the establishment of the specific opportunity can also be expressed as "a specific notification that the player can recognize or guess."

Feature D10. The specific notification is made by display and is performed.
When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means, the specific effect is provided with a means for continuing the specific notification at the same display position as the display position of the specific notification immediately before the cancellation or interruption. The gaming machine according to the feature D9.

In the above configuration, the display position of the specific notification is not changed before and after the cancellation or interruption of the specific effect. As a result, the player can easily notice the role of the specific notification (substantial winning notification), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by losing sight of the specific notification after the cancellation or interruption.

For each configuration of the above features D1 to D10, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Special whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the trigger of the transition lottery) Special determination means for executing determination (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101),
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, a specific effect (continuous effect) for a specific notification (winning effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to the winning of the specific result. ) Is set to be executed over a plurality of games (a function of setting the information of this precursor scenario in the scenario data table by the display control device 81), and
The specific effect executing means (display control) for executing the specific effect on the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table). (A function to execute the continuous effect execution process by the device 81) and
If a predetermined condition (the second BB winning is established, the game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is satisfied at least during the execution of the specific effect, the transition game to the special state or the transition to the special state (A function to execute a process for updating the number of games by the main controller 101 (a function of not updating the precursor counter and the CZ counter in the case of a 2-bet game)) and a specific means for delaying the game.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the changing means for changing the effect mode of the specific effect so that a predetermined notification (defeat effect, success / failure effect, draw effect) different from the specific notification is performed. (A function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by the display control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment. When a 2-bet game is played, a notification corresponding to the disconnection is once performed, and then a revival effect is performed. Function to change) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined determination opportunity is established, a special determination as to whether or not to cause a special state advantageous to the player is executed. Then, when the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result corresponding to causing a special state, a specific effect for performing a specific notification corresponding to the winning of the specific result is executed over a plurality of games. .. Further, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the transition game to the special state or the game capable of transitioning to the special state is delayed. However, since the specific effect is set based on the state before the transition game or the like is delayed, when the transition game or the like is delayed as described above, the specific notification (winning notification) is sent in the specific effect. Even though it has been done, the inconvenience of not easily transitioning to a special state can occur. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's trust in the production may be lowered, and the specific production cannot be continued. In this respect, in this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification different from the specific notification is performed, so that the special state does not occur after the end of the effect. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of production contradiction even if the period continues. Therefore, even if the transition game to the special state is delayed in the middle of the specific effect, the specific effect can be continued.

It should be noted that the present feature may further include a configuration that "the specific effect setting means sets the specific effect so that at least the specific notification is executed before the transition to the special state". ..

Further, in this feature, as a precondition configuration, "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a symbol (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the symbol is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied". Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R area visible through 26L, 26M, 26L) is provided, variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. Is a game machine in which the game is played as one game when the game is stopped. ”

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined notification is a notification (defeat effect, success / failure effect) corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result.

In the above configuration, the specific effect is continued so that the notification corresponding to the non-winning (disengagement notification) is performed instead of the specific notification (winning notification), so that the player can be made to think that he / she is out. As a result, consistency with the production is maintained even if the period of not transitioning to the special state continues after the end of the production, and the specific production can be continued even if the transition to the special state is delayed during the execution of the specific production. It will be possible.

Feature E3. The changing means sets the predetermined conditions before executing the specific notification (reach eyes, etc.) that the player can recognize or guess that the specific notification or the specific result has been obtained during the execution of the specific effect. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification is performed when is satisfied.

In this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied before the specific notification is executed in the specific effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification is performed. For example, if the predetermined notification is performed after the specific notification is performed in the specific production, there is a concern that a contradiction may occur in the specific production and give an unnatural impression to the player. According to this configuration, since the effect mode is changed within the range where such a contradiction does not occur, the effect of the feature E1 or the feature E2 can be obtained while suppressing the occurrence of a contradiction in the specific effect. Becomes possible.

Feature E4. When the specific effect is being executed and the predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific notification or the specific notification is executed, the specific effect being executed is provided with a means for stopping or interrupting the specific effect. The gaming machine according to feature E3.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied after the execution of the specific notification, the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted, so that the predetermined notification is prevented from being executed after the execution of the specific notification, which is a contradiction in the specific effect. Can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E5. As the specific effect, a plurality of types of the specific effect (first continuous effect, second continuous effect) are provided.
The changing means is a means for changing the effect mode of the specific effect so that the predetermined notification corresponding to the type of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means or being executed by the specific effect executing means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, which comprises (a function of executing the processes of steps S3303 and S3306 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification corresponding to the type of the specific effect being executed is performed. That is, since the predetermined notification matches the type of the specific notification, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the production is switched to the production for the disengagement notification in the middle of the specific production. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player and to ensure consistency with the occurrence of a period in which the player does not shift to the special state after the end of the production.

Feature E6. The first specific effect setting means as the specific effect setting means and
When a predetermined specific condition (winning in the pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state, the specific effect for the predetermined notification (continuous effect for the pseudo-precursor) is performed a plurality of times. The second specific effect setting means (a function of executing the specific contract notification process by the display control device 81), which is set to be executed over the same period.
With
The changing means is characterized by providing means for changing the effect mode so that a part of the specific effect for the predetermined notification is executed as the predetermined notification or as an effect for executing the predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5.

In the above configuration, the second specific effect for disengagement notification is executed in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state. Then, when the production mode of the specific effect is changed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a part of the second specific effect is diverted. Since the second specific effect for the disengagement notification is originally configured as a specific effect like the specific effect for the specific notification (winning notification), the second specific effect is utilized as the specific effect after the change. By doing so, it is possible to satisfactorily connect the specific effect before the change and the specific effect after the change. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the production mode of the specific effect has been changed. As a result, it becomes easy for the player to think that the player is out of the game, and it is possible to more preferably ensure the consistency with the fact that there is a period during which the player does not shift to the special state after the end of the production. Moreover, since a part of the second specific effect is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect for change. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated effect, and it is also possible to save the capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data.

Feature E7. As the first specific effect, a plurality of types of the first specific effect (first specific effect for this precursor, second specific effect) are provided.
As the second specific effect, a plurality of types of the second specific effect (first specific effect for pseudo-sign, second specific effect) corresponding to the type of the first specific effect are provided.
The changing means is a type of the first specific effect set by the first specific effect setting means or being executed by the specific effect executing means as the predetermined notification or as an effect for executing the predetermined notification. A feature E6 characterized in that it includes means for changing the effect mode (a function of executing the process of step S3303 by the display control device 81) so that a part of the corresponding second specific effect is executed. Described game machine.

In the above configuration, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed by using a part of the second specific effect corresponding to the type of the specific effect being executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to understand that the production is switched to the production for notification of disconnection in the middle of the specific production, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

Feature E8. The first specific effect and the second specific effect are configured so that the effect content progresses according to the execution of the game.
The feature E6 is characterized in that the changing means includes means for changing the effect mode so that a part of the second specific effect corresponding to the continuation of the first specific effect before the change is executed. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature E7.

In the above configuration, since the production mode of the specific effect is changed so that a part of the second specific effect corresponding to the continuation of the first specific effect before the change is executed, before and after the change from the viewpoint of the player. Boundaries can be obscured. As a result, it becomes difficult to understand that the production is switched to the production for notification of disconnection in the middle of the specific production, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

Feature E9. The specific effect setting means includes a game number setting means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) for setting the number of games to be executed of the specific effect.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a means for grasping the number of remaining games of the specific effect is provided.
The feature E1 is characterized in that the changing means includes means for preventing the change from being made when the number of remaining games grasped by the means for grasping the number of remaining games in the production is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games. The game machine according to any one of E8.

If the specific effect is advanced to some extent, the player may generally determine the hit. If such a player switches to the off notification when the hit is almost known, there is a concern that the player may be disliked and the interest in the specific effect may be reduced. In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, the number of remaining games is grasped as the progress of the specific effect, and when the grasped number of remaining games is less than or equal to the predetermined number, the predetermined notification is sent. The configuration is such that no changes are executed. In other words, instead of uniformly executing the change to the predetermined notification, the presence or absence of the above change is used properly according to the number of remaining games, so that it is suppressed that the off notification is executed while the player almost knows the hit. it can.

Feature E10. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific means delays the transition game to the special state or the game capable of transitioning to the special state over a plurality of games (to the second BB state). The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E9, which is characterized in that the game is transferred to the corresponding bonus game).

In this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the state shifts to the specific state, and the transition to the special state is delayed for a relatively long period of time. When the delay period is long as described above, the delay in the transition to the special state for the specific notification in the specific effect cannot be ignored. By applying the configuration of any of the above features E1 to E9 to such a situation, it becomes possible to appropriately deal with the delay in migration.

Feature E11. The specific effect setting means is set by the resetting means (display control device 81) to set the specific effect for the specific notification to be executed after the specific state when the change is executed by the change means. The gaming machine according to feature E10, characterized in that it includes (functions of executing processes in steps S2201, step S2215, and steps S2207 and subsequent steps).

In the above configuration, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the specific effect is not executed by the changing means, the specific effect is executed after the execution of the specific effect, and the specific notification is performed in the specific effect. As a result, even if the specific notification is canceled due to the establishment of a predetermined condition during the specific production, the winning notification can be appropriately given to the player.

Feature E12. When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (winning effect, transformation success effect) is a game of a plurality of times. Wait period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, second game number management process (process of setting the CZ counter)) in which the standby period (precursor mode, CZ mode) can be set so as to stand by. ) And the function to execute)
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an updating means for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game (a function of executing the game number updating process by the main control device 101) ,
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger is won). When the above is established, the special state transition means (function of executing the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the special state, and
With
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect is executed in the waiting period.
The specific state prevents the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed over a plurality of games.
The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein the resetting means is set so that the specific effect for the specific notification is executed in the remaining waiting period after the specific state. ..

In the above configuration, when the specific effect for the specific notification is executed after the end of the specific state, the specific effect is executed within the range of the remaining waiting period after the end of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress that the specific effect after the specific state is executed beyond the waiting period and the waiting period and the specific effect are not synchronized.

Feature E13. The gaming machine according to feature E11 or E12, wherein the resetting means includes means for setting a new specific effect for the specific notification to be executed after the specific state.

In the above configuration, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the specific notification is not executed by the changing means, a new specific effect for the specific notification is executed again after the end of the specific state. As a result, the specific effect that was executed when the predetermined condition was satisfied (the specific effect that was executed at the time of change) and the specific effect after the specific state are clearly distinguished, and the player confuses and confuses both. Can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E14. When the change is executed by the changing means, the specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect for the specific notification is executed after the specific effect whose effect mode has been changed is completed. Equipped with setting means
The resetting means (fifth embodiment) is such that the specific effect for the specific notification is started before the end of the specific state and is executed straddling after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E10 to E13, wherein the display control device 81 is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S4001 to S4008).

Depending on the timing of transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state may be small. In this case, it may be difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that the processing load required for switching will increase and the burden at the time of design due to the creation of the dedicated effect will increase. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific effect is started prior to the end of the specific state, it is possible to secure the number of games for executing the specific effect even when the number of remaining games in the waiting period is small. As a result, after being canceled or interrupted, while appropriately suppressing the inability to properly execute the specific effect due to the shortage of the number of games, the increase in the processing load due to the dedicated effect, and the increase in the burden at the time of design. It becomes possible to execute a specific effect of.

In this feature, "when the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least the transition to the special state and the specific notification (winning effect, transformation success effect) Wait period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, second game number management process) that can set a standby period (precursor mode, CZ mode) so that one of them waits for a plurality of games. A function to execute the CZ counter setting process) and an update means (main control) that updates the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means. The function of executing the game number update process by the device 101) and when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result in advance. When the specified transition condition (winning the AT mode transition trigger) is satisfied, the special state transition means for shifting the game state to the special state (a function of executing the winning result handling process by the main control device 101). When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect is executed in the waiting period, and the specific state is set. , The update of the remaining number of games by the update means is prevented from being executed over a plurality of games. "

Feature E15. When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (winning effect, transformation success effect) is a game of a plurality of times. Wait period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, second game number management process (process of setting the CZ counter)) in which the standby period (precursor mode, CZ mode) can be set so as to stand by. ) And the function to execute)
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an updating means for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game (a function of executing the game number updating process by the main control device 101) ,
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger is won). When the above is established, the special state transition means (function of executing the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the special state, and
With
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect is executed in the waiting period.
The specific state prevents the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed over a plurality of games.
When the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the specific effect for the specific effect is started before the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature E14, characterized in that it includes means for performing (a function of executing the process of step S4001 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, whether or not to start the specific state before the end of the specific state is switched according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the waiting period is large, and the specific effect being unnecessarily lengthened to give the player a feeling of delay.

In addition, this feature further includes a configuration that "when the number of remaining games in the waiting period grasped by the means for grasping the number of remaining games is larger than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the end of the specific state". May be good.

Feature E16. When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the changing means is a game in which the predetermined notification is performed after the predetermined notification (defeat effect, success / failure effect) different from the specific notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it is provided with a means for changing the production mode of the specific effect (a function of changing to a resurrection effect) so that the specific notification is performed in a later game.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a predetermined notification different from the specific notification is once performed, and the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the winning notification is performed in the subsequent game. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of games to be executed for a specific effect while preventing a contradiction from the result of the special determination, and it is possible to cope with the delay in the transition to the special state.

Feature E17. The specific means is characterized in that the transition game to the special state or the game capable of transitioning to the special state is delayed by one game for one fulfillment of the predetermined condition. The game machine described in.

In this configuration, the delay in transitioning to the special state when a predetermined condition is satisfied is limited to one game. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the above feature E16 (configuration to be changed to the revival effect) to such a delay. , It becomes possible to delay the specific notification by following the delay in the transition to the special state.

Feature E18. When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (winning effect, transformation success effect) is a game of a plurality of times. Wait period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, second game number management process (process of setting the CZ counter)) in which the standby period (precursor mode, CZ mode) can be set so as to stand by. ) And the function to execute)
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the number of remaining games in the waiting period is updated based on the game being started with the number of bets set to the first number (3). Update means (a function to execute the game number update process by the main control device 101) and
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger is won). When the above is established, the special state transition means (function of executing the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the special state, and
With
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect is executed in the waiting period.
The specific means is for preventing the update of the remaining number of games by the update means from being executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The game according to feature E16 or feature E17, wherein the predetermined condition is that the game is started in a state where the number of bets is a second number (2) different from the first number. Machine.

In this configuration, the transition to the special state may or may not be delayed depending on the number of bets when playing the game. For example, in a situation where a player is putting in a game medium by maintenance, he intends to put in the first number of game media and start the game, but unintentionally starts the game by putting in the second number. It can often happen. In this case, it is conceivable to alert the player to prevent the game from starting in the second number, but this may distract the player and make it difficult to concentrate on the specific production. is there. In this respect, in this configuration, the configuration of the feature E16 or the feature E17 is applied to the delay of the transition based on the operation of such a player, and the game machine side takes measures. As a result, the player's operation error (mistake in the number of bets) is allowed, and as a result, the player can enjoy the specific effect without worrying about the number of bets.

For each configuration of the above features E1 to E18, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. When a predetermined specific condition (winning of the number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode) is satisfied, a specific effect (continuous effect) executed over a plurality of games is set to be performed. Specific effect setting means (function to execute continuous effect setting process by display control device 81) and
A function of executing the continuous effect execution process by the specific effect execution means (display control device 81) that executes the specific effect based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table). )When,
With
The specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect is performed in a specific period (precursor mode, CZ mode) which is a period during which the specific effect can be executed.
An update means (a function of executing a game number update process by the main control device 101) for updating the number of remaining games in the specific period according to the execution of the game, and
When a predetermined condition (second BB winning) is satisfied in the specific period, the specific means (main control device) that causes a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the update of the remaining number of games by the update means is not executed. Function to execute bonus state processing by 101) and
With
The specific effect setting means is a first means (in a bonus by the display control device 81 according to the fifth embodiment) for causing the specific effect to be performed using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state. Equipped with a function to execute production setting processing)
The first means is a second means (processing of steps S4001 to S4008 by the display control device 81) so that the specific effect is started before the end of the specific state and is executed straddling after the end of the specific state. A game machine characterized by having a function to execute.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is set to be executed over a plurality of games. This setting is made so that the specific effect is executed in a specific period during which the specific effect can be executed. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period, the game shifts to a specific state in which the number of remaining games in the specific period is not updated, and the update of the number of remaining games is interrupted. In such a configuration, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the specific state during the execution of the specific effect, it may be desired to execute the specific effect again after the end of the specific state. However, depending on the timing of transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining in the specific period after the end of the specific state may be small. In this case, it may be difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. In addition, although it is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect when the number of remaining games is small, there is a concern that the processing load required for switching may increase and the burden at the time of designing due to the creation of the dedicated effect may increase. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific effect is started prior to the end of the specific state, it is possible to secure a larger number of games than the actual number of remaining games as the number of games to be executed of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being properly executed due to the shortage of the number of games, the increase in the processing load due to the dedicated effect, and the increase in the burden at the time of design, and the remaining specific period after the specific state can be achieved. It becomes possible to preferably carry out the continuous effect used.

In this feature, as a prerequisite configuration, "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a symbol (design) is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the symbol is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied". Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R area visible through 26L, 26M, 26L) is provided, variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. Is a game machine in which the game is played as one game when the game is stopped. ”

Feature F2. The second means is a means (display control device) for causing the specific effect to be started before the end of the specific state when the number of games remaining in the specific period after the end of the specific state is a predetermined number or less. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it includes a function of executing the process of step S4001 according to 81).

In the above configuration, it is switched whether or not to start the specific state before the end of the specific state according to the number of games remaining in the specific period after the end of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the specific period is large, and the specific effect being unnecessarily lengthened to give the player a feeling of delay.

Feature F3. When the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number of games grasping means is larger than the predetermined number, the feature F2 is characterized by providing means for causing the specific effect to be started after the end of the specific state. The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being started before the end of the specific state until the number of remaining games in the specific period is sufficiently secured after the end of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress that the specific effect is unnecessarily lengthened to give the player a feeling of delay.

Feature F4. The second means is
With reference to the remaining status of the specific state (the number of remaining games of the bonus game, the remaining number of cards up to the maximum payout number) or the progress status (the number of digested games of the bonus game, the number of payouts from the start of the bonus game), this game A start determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4002 by the display control device 81) for determining whether or not the game is a start game in which the specific effect should be started, and
When the start determination means determines that the game is the start game, the means for starting the specific effect (the function of the display control device 81 to execute the processes of steps S4002 to S4008) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3, characterized in that

When the specific effect is started before the end of the specific state, for example, if the start timing of the specific effect is too early, the specific effect ends earlier than the remaining specific period after the specific state elapses, or vice versa. If the start timing of the specific effect is too late, the specific effect may exceed the specific period. In this respect, in this configuration, the number of remaining games in the specific state is specified or estimated with reference to the remaining situation or the progress situation each time in the specific state, and the start timing of the specific effect is determined based on the result. As a result, the specific effect can be started at an appropriate timing in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific state, and the specific effect suitable for both the number of remaining games in the specific state and the number of remaining games in the specific period is preferably performed. It becomes possible to do.

Feature F5. The specific state is a bonus game in which the maximum number of payouts of the game medium is set.
The second means is characterized by including means for causing the specific effect to be started in the final game of the bonus game (a function of executing the processing of steps S4002 to S4008 by the display control device 81). Features The game machine according to any one of F1 to F4.

In the case of a bonus game that ends on the condition that the number of payouts of the game medium reaches the maximum number of payouts, the number of games to be executed (transition period to the bonus state) is not uniquely determined, but the role in the bonus game If the game is won by lottery, and the number of game media payouts determined for the role is equal to or greater than the remaining payouts up to the maximum payout number, the game is identified as the final game of the bonus game. be able to. That is, although the reliability of the estimation of the remaining 2 games and 3 games may be low, the final game can be accurately specified. Therefore, if the continuous production is started in the final game in the specific state, the specific production can be executed in a state where one game is surely added to the number of remaining games in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the number of games to be executed for the specific effect, but also to preferably synchronize the specific effect with the specific period.

Feature F6. Special whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the trigger of the transition lottery) Equipped with special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101)
The specific condition is that the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state.
The first means is such that the specific effect for the specific notification (winning effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to the winning of the specific result is executed using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F5, which is characterized in that it is to be used.

In the above configuration, the specific effect is executed using the remaining specific period after the specific state, and the specific notification corresponding to the winning of the specific result is executed in the specific effect. Therefore, for example, even when the specific notification is hindered by shifting to the specific state during the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the winning.

Feature F7. The specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect for the specific notification is performed in the specific period.
When the specific period elapses, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the AT mode transition trigger) is satisfied after the elapse of the specific period, the special state transition to shift the gaming state to the special state Means (a function to execute the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) and
If the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, the means (first, second, fourth, fifth) for stopping the specific effect during the execution. The function of executing the continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F6, which is characterized by the above.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the lapse of a specific period or after the lapse, the gaming state is shifted to the special state. Under such a configuration, if the specific period is extended due to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the standby period will be different. For this reason, even though the winning is notified by the specific notification, there may be an inconvenience that the player does not easily shift to the special state, and there is a concern that the player's trust in the production may be lowered. In this respect, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, the specific effect is canceled. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that does not easily shift to the special state even though the specific notification is performed. In this case, the specific effect is not executed in the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, but the specific effect is executed again using the remaining period after the specific state, and the specific notification is performed in it. Will be Therefore, even if the specific effect is canceled, the player can be appropriately notified of the winning.

Feature F8. The specific effect setting means is set so that the specific effect for the specific notification is performed in the specific period.
When the specific period elapses, or when a predetermined transition condition (winning the AT mode transition trigger) is satisfied after the elapse of the specific period, the special state transition to shift the gaming state to the special state Means (a function to execute the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) and
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification (defeat effect, transformation failure effect) corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result is performed. The gaming machine according to feature F6 or feature F7, which comprises means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by the display control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment).

In the above configuration, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the lapse of a specific period or after the lapse, the gaming state is shifted to the special state. Under such a configuration, if the specific period is extended due to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the standby period will be different. For this reason, even though the winning is notified by the specific notification, there may be an inconvenience that the player does not easily shift to the special state, and there is a concern that the player's trust in the production may be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, the predetermined notification (disengagement notification) corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result is performed. The production mode of the specific effect is changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the effect is off, and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the effect contradiction even if the period of not shifting to the special state continues after the end of the effect. In this case, the specific effect is not executed in the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, but the specific effect is executed again using the remaining period after the specific state, and the specific notification is performed in it. Will be Therefore, even when the effect mode is changed so that the specific effect is not executed in the specific effect, the player can be appropriately notified of the winning.

Feature F9. The first specific effect setting means as the specific effect setting means and
When a predetermined condition (winning in the pseudo-precursor execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state, the specific effect for the predetermined notification (continuous effect for the pseudo-precursor) becomes a plurality of games. A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) that is set to be executed over a period of time, and
The changing means has the feature F8 that changes the effect mode so that a part of the specific effect for the predetermined notification is executed as the predetermined notification or as an effect for executing the predetermined notification. The game machine described.

In the above configuration, a specific effect for disengagement notification is executed in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state. Then, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a part of the specific effect for notifying the deviation is diverted. Since this specific effect for the deviation notification is originally configured as a specific effect like the specific effect for the specific notification (winning notification), the specific effect for the deviation notification is utilized as the specific effect after the change. By doing so, it is possible to satisfactorily connect the specific effect before the change and the specific effect after the change. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the production mode of the specific effect has been changed. As a result, it becomes easy for the player to think that the player is out of the game, and it is possible to more preferably ensure the consistency with the fact that there is a period during which the player does not shift to the special state after the end of the production. Moreover, since a part of the specific effect for notification of disconnection is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect for change. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated effect, and it is also possible to save the capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data.

Feature F10. The game according to any one of the features F7 to F9, wherein the second means includes means for executing a new specific effect using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state. Machine.

In the above configuration, as a specific effect using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state, a new specific effect is executed again for the specific state started before the transition to the specific state. As a result, it is preferable that the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the specific effect using the remaining specific period after the specific state are clearly distinguished, and the player confuses and confuses the two. It can be suppressed.

Features F11. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the specific state is executed over a plurality of games.

In this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the state shifts to the specific state, and the transition to the special state is delayed for a relatively long period of time. When the delay period is long as described above, the delay in the transition to the special state for the specific notification in the specific effect cannot be ignored. By applying the configuration of any of the above features F1 to F10 to such a situation, it becomes possible to appropriately cope with the delay in the transition.

Feature F12. Special whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the trigger of the transition lottery) Equipped with special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101)
The specific condition is that the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state.
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, transformation success effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, management of the number of second games) that can set a waiting period (precursor mode, CZ mode) so that at least one of Equipped with a function to execute processing (processing to set the CZ counter)
The specific period is the waiting period.
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the update result becomes the predetermined result, the gaming state is set to the special. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, characterized in that it includes a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result handling process by the main control device 101) for transitioning to a state.

In the above configuration, when the judgment result of the special judgment based on the establishment of the predetermined judgment opportunity becomes a specific result, at least one of the transition to a special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification that the specific result is won is provided. A waiting period for waiting is set, and a specific effect is executed according to this waiting period. By applying any of the configurations of the feature F1 to the feature F11 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the specific effect in relation to the remaining waiting period after the specific state.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F12, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Special whether or not to generate a special state (additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) advantageous to the player based on a predetermined judgment trigger (winning the trigger of the transition lottery) Special determination means for executing determination (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by the main control device 101),
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, transformation success effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by the main control device 101, management of the number of second games) that can set a waiting period (precursor mode, CZ mode) so that at least one of (Function to execute processing (processing to set CZ counter)) and
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, an updating means for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game (a function of executing the game number updating process by the main control device 101) ,
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the update result becomes the predetermined result, the gaming state is set to the special. Special state transition means (function to execute winning result correspondence processing by the main control device 101) to shift to the state,
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, a specific effect (continuous effect) executed over a plurality of games is started in a predetermined game during the waiting period, and the predetermined effect is executed in the specific effect. Specific effect setting means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) for setting the specific notification to be executed in a specific game after the game, and
The specific effect executing means (display control) for executing the specific effect on the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table). (A function to execute the continuous effect execution process by the device 81) and
If at least the first condition (the game is started with the specified number set to 2) or the second condition (the second BB winning is established) is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the number of remaining games by the updating means. Specific means for preventing the update of (a function for executing the game number update process by the main control device 101 (in the case of a 2-bet game, the precursor counter and the CZ counter are not updated during the bonus game)) and
With
When the second condition is satisfied, the period during which the update by the update means is not executed is longer than when the first condition is satisfied.
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the first means for continuing the specific effect during execution (for executing the continuous effect by the display control device 81 according to the third and fourth embodiments). Function to execute processing) and
When the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the second means (the effect during the bonus by the display control device 81 in the first to fifth embodiments) for canceling or interrupting the specific effect during execution. Function to execute setting process) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when the judgment result of the special judgment based on the establishment of the predetermined judgment opportunity becomes a specific result, at least one of the transition to a special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification that the specific result is won is provided. The waiting period to be waited for is set. In this waiting period, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games, and the specific notification is performed in the specific game during the specific effect. Then, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the lapse of the waiting period or after the lapse of the waiting period, the gaming state is shifted to the special state. That is, after the specific notification is performed in the specific effect and the player is notified of the winning, the game state is changed to a special state or a state in which the game state can be changed (a state in which the state is changed when the transition condition is satisfied). ing.

Here, in this configuration, if at least the first condition or the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is extended and the end game of the period is delayed. On the other hand, since the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are different. In this case, in this configuration, when the waiting period is extended during the execution of the specific effect, it is configured to properly use whether to continue the specific effect being executed, or to cancel or interrupt it according to the length of the waiting period. .. Specifically, when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect and the waiting period is extended in a short extension period, it is assumed that the deviation of the end of the waiting period from the execution timing of the specific notification is within the allowable range. , Priority is given to the continuation of specific production. On the other hand, if the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect and the waiting period is extended for a long extension period, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted as the above deviation cannot be ignored, and the specific notification is not executed. Forcibly terminate as. With such a configuration, it is possible to expand the opportunity for the specific production to be continued, and to prevent the production contradiction from occurring even if the period of not transitioning to the special state continues after the production is completed. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately deal with an event in which the waiting period is extended during the execution of the specific effect, as compared with the configuration in which the specific effect is always continued or the specific effect is always stopped or interrupted. ..

In this feature, as a prerequisite configuration, "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a symbol (design) is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the symbol is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied". Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R area visible through 26L, 26M, 26L) is provided, variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. Is a game machine in which the game is played as one game when the game is stopped. ”

Feature G2. When the second condition is satisfied, the specific means shifts to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the update of the remaining number of games by the update means is not executed over a plurality of games. Equipped with a state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101)
When the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted by the second means, the third means (step by the display control device 81) executes the specific effect during the remaining waiting period after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that it includes S2201, step S2215, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2207 to S2212).

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means, the specific effect is re-executed after the end of the specific state. Since the winning notification can be performed in the specific effect of this re-execution, it is possible to suppress the transition to the special state in a state where it is not clear whether or not the specific result has been won. Further, in the above case, since the specific effect is executed in the remaining waiting period after the end of the specific state, it is possible to preferably synchronize the waiting period and the specific effect.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the third means executes the specific effect so that the specific notification is performed.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed in the specific effect after the specific state, even if the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means, the player can be appropriately notified of the winning. it can.

Feature G4. When the second condition is satisfied, the specific means shifts to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the update of the remaining number of games by the update means is not executed over a plurality of games. Equipped with a state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101)
After the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted by the second means, the third means for executing the specific effect (the bonus medium effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the fifth embodiment is executed). Function to do)
The third means starts the specific effect before the end of the specific state, and executes the specific effect straddling after the end of the specific state (steps S4001 to 8 by the display control device 81 in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S4008).

Depending on the timing of transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state may be small. In this case, it may be difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that the processing load required for switching will increase and the burden at the time of design due to the creation of the dedicated effect will increase. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific effect is started prior to the end of the specific state, it is possible to secure the number of games for executing the specific effect even when the number of remaining games in the waiting period is small. As a result, after being canceled or interrupted, while appropriately suppressing the inability to properly execute the specific effect due to the shortage of the number of games, the increase in the processing load due to the dedicated effect, and the increase in the burden at the time of design. It becomes possible to execute a specific effect of.

Feature G5. The third means is means for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state (step S4001 by the display control device 81) when the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state is a predetermined number or less. The gaming machine according to the feature G4, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

In the above configuration, whether or not to start the specific state before the end of the specific state is switched according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the waiting period is large, and the specific effect being unnecessarily lengthened to give the player a feeling of delay.

It should be noted that the present feature may further include a configuration that "when the number of remaining games in the waiting period grasped by the grasping means is larger than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the end of the specific state".

Feature G6. In the first means, after the predetermined notification (defeat effect, success / failure effect) corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result is performed, the specific notification is performed in a game after the game in which the predetermined notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that it is provided with means for continuing the specific effect so as to be described.

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued by the first means, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification (disengagement notification) is once performed and the winning notification is performed in the subsequent game. As a result, the number of games for which the specific effect is executed can be appropriately increased while the specific notification is finally performed so as not to cause a contradiction with the result of the special judgment, and the transition to the special state is delayed. It becomes possible to correspond.

Feature G7. Any of the features G1 to G6, wherein the specific means is such that the period during which the update of the remaining number of games is not executed is one game for the first fulfillment of the first condition. The game machine described in.

In this configuration, the delay in the transition to the special state when the first condition is satisfied is limited to one game, so it is preferable to have an opportunity to continue the specific effect by continuing the specific effect in the case of such a delay. It will be possible to expand to. Further, by applying the configuration of the feature G6 (a configuration for changing to the revival effect) of this feature, it is possible to delay the specific notification by following the delay in the transition to the special state.

For each configuration of the above features G1 to G7, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A plurality of variable display areas (areas of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed,
A first operating means (start lever 41) that starts variable display of a pattern in each of the variable display areas when operated, and
Second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display areas when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the first operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set in the plurality of variable display areas, a number corresponding to the predetermined result. Means (a function of executing the payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out the game medium of the above or giving a privilege (virtual game medium) corresponding to the payout, and
It is a game machine equipped with
At least a first gaming state (advantageous section) and a second gaming state (normal section) different from the first gaming state are provided as the gaming state.
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a transition means for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state (a function of executing the advantageous section transition lottery process by the main control device 101 and the section display first process) and
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the end means for ending the first game state (the function of executing the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
When the first game state ends, a specific effect (ending effect) corresponding to the end of the first game state is a predetermined effect means (ending effect) over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. With the specific effect execution means (function of executing the ending effect setting process and the ending effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65). ,
When a predetermined specific condition (second BB prize) is satisfied, a specific state means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that causes a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) and ,
With
The specific state is different from the first game state or the predetermined state (AT mode) before the specific state occurs in the first game state in the increase rate of the game medium or the expected net increase per game. ,
The predetermined end condition includes a predetermined end condition in which the increase number of game media (MY of increasing / decreasing number of advantageous sections) in the first game state reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets).
The specific effect executing means starts the specific effect when a predetermined start condition corresponding to the predetermined end condition (which is the start timing of the ending effect in a situation where the upper limit increase number is expected to be reached) is satisfied. (A function to execute the second ending effect by the display control device 81) is provided.
When the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect (second ending effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, the specific means (sixth and seventh) for canceling or interrupting the executing specific effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing an effect setting process at the time of full stop and an effect setting process during a bonus by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment of the above.

In the above configuration, when the gaming state shifts to the first gaming state, the first gaming state ends when the increase number of the game media in the first gaming state reaches the upper limit increase number. Then, when the first game state ends, a specific effect corresponding to the end is executed over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. As a result, the player can recognize that the first gaming state ends.

However, during the execution of the specific effect, the game medium is changed to the specific state (the first game state or the state in which the increase rate of the game medium or the expected net increase per game is different from the predetermined state before the specific state occurs in the first game state). When the transition is made, the pace at which the game medium increases changes from before, so that the actual end game in the first game state changes from the end game expected at the start of the specific effect. As a result, there is a problem that the first game state does not end easily even though the specific effect is performed to the end, or the first game state ends before the specific effect is performed to the end. There is a risk. In this respect, in this configuration, when a transition to a specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and the specific effect is the first. 1 It is possible to suitably suppress the confusion of the player due to not synchronizing with the gaming state.

Feature H2. The first gaming state can cause a transition to a special state (AT mode) that is advantageous to the player.
The second gaming state does not cause a transition to the special state.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the predetermined state is the special state.

In the above configuration, a transition to a special state may occur during the stay in the first gaming state. This special state is advantageous for the advantageous person, and the game medium is likely to increase. Therefore, the predetermined end condition for ending the first game state (the increase number of the game medium in the first game state reaches the upper limit increase number) is likely to be satisfied during the execution of the special state, and the specific effect is also It will be easier to do in special conditions. Then, when the transition to the specific state occurs in the situation where the specific effect is being executed during the special state, the actual end game of the first game state changes from the end game expected at the start of the specific effect. Become. Such a tendency becomes more remarkable as the difference between the rate of increase in the game medium or the expected net increase per game between the special state and the specific state is large. In this regard, if a transition to a specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted. Therefore, even though the specific effect has been performed to the end, the first game state ( It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the special state) not ending or the first gaming state (special state) ending before the specific effect is performed to the end.

In addition, in this feature, the configuration that "the specific state has a smaller increase rate of a game medium or an expected net increase per game than the special state" may be further provided. In this case, since the actual end game of the first game state was expected at the start of the specific effect, it will be delayed from the end game, and even though the specific effect has been performed to the end, the first game state (special state) is quite difficult. However, according to the configuration of the above-mentioned feature H2, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such an inconvenience.

Feature H3. The first means as the specific means and
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, which comprises a second means for executing the specific effect after the end of the specific state when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means. ..

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is executed after the end of the specific state, the player is appropriately notified that the first game state ends even if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted in the middle. Will be possible.

It should be noted that the present feature may further include a configuration that "the specific state has a smaller increase rate of the game medium or an expected net increase per game than the first game state or the predetermined state". In this case, the transition to the specific state causes a delay in the end game of the first game state, and by applying the above feature H3 to such a configuration, the above effect can be preferably obtained.

Further, in the present feature, "provided a grasping means for grasping the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the specific state" and "the second means is the remaining increase number grasped by the grasping means". A configuration of "execution of the specific effect with a corresponding number of games" may be further provided. In this case, the specific effect after the specific state can be ended according to the end timing of the first game state changed by the transition to the specific state, and the specific effect and the first game state can be suitably synchronized. Become.

Feature H4. The second means is characterized in that, as the specific effect to be executed after the end of the specific state, a means for executing an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect stopped or interrupted by the first means is provided. Features The gaming machine according to H3.

In the above configuration, as the specific effect after the specific state, the continuation of the canceled or interrupted specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect can be executed to the end. For example, when the part of the specific effect that the player wants to see is set at the end of the specific effect, the player takes care not to satisfy the predetermined condition in order to avoid the specific effect being canceled or interrupted. Need arises. This makes it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game in the first game state and the specific effect. In this respect, in this configuration, since the continuation of the canceled or interrupted specific effect is resumed after the end of the specific state, the specific effect can be executed to the end even if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific effect. Therefore, the player can play the game without being distracted by whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the configuration can be made easy to play.

In addition, for example, when designing a specific production in consideration of the end in the middle, the part that becomes a mountainous part in the production (the part that the game machine designer wants to show to the player or the part that is spectacular to the player) There is no choice but to set it in the early or middle stage of a specific production. In this case, it tends to be a specific production with a dented bottom impression, and it becomes difficult to design the production in order to obtain the support of the player. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the mountainous part is set at the final stage of the specific effect, the implementation of the part cannot be canceled due to cancellation or interruption, so that the effect design of the specific effect can be facilitated. That is, not only is it easy for the player to play, but it can also contribute to reducing the design burden.

Feature H5. A means for grasping the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the specific state is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4, wherein the second means includes means for executing the specific effect with the number of games corresponding to the remaining increase number grasped by the grasping means. ..

Depending on the length of the transition period to the specific state, if the specific effect is restarted from the middle after the end of the specific state, the player may not understand what has started, which may cause confusion for the player. In this respect, in this configuration, since a new specific effect is executed after the specific state, it is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to preferably suppress the confusion of the player. In addition, when executing a new specific effect after the specific state, the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the specific state is grasped, and the game is executed according to the remaining increase number. The specific effect after the specific state can be ended according to the end timing of the first game state changed by the transition to the state, and the specific effect and the first game state can be suitably synchronized.

When this feature is applied to the feature H4, "the specific state has a first specific state and a second specific state having a longer transition period than the first specific state, and the second specific state. When the first specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the means follows the continuation of the specific effect stopped or interrupted by the first means. When the means for executing the corresponding effect after the end of the specific effect and the second specific state occur during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means, a new specific effect is specified. It is provided with means for executing the effect after the end of the specific state. " In this case, it is possible to switch whether to restart the subsequent specific effect or to execute a new specific effect according to the type of the specific state (the length of the transition period to the specific state).

Feature H6. The specific effect is configured to perform specific notifications (notifications such as "Congratulations" and "END") that allow the player to recognize the end of the specific effect or the first game state.
The specific means is characterized in that when the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect (second ending effect), the specific means is stopped or interrupted so that the specific notification is not performed in the specific effect being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H5.

In the above configuration, in the specific effect, the specific notification is performed so that the player can recognize the end of the specific effect or the first game state. With this specific notification, the player can recognize that the specific effect or the first game state ends. Then, in this configuration, when a specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted so that the specific notification is not performed in the specific effect being executed. As a result, there is an inconvenience that the first game state does not end easily even though the specific effect is performed to the end, or the first game state ends before the specific effect is performed to the end. Can be suitably suppressed.

When applying this feature to the feature H3, regarding the "second means", "when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the specific effect for the specific notification is terminated in the specific state. It may be a "second means to be executed later". According to such a configuration, even if the specific effect is canceled or interrupted due to the transition to the specific state, the player can appropriately inform the player that the first game state is terminated by the specific notification in the specific effect executed after the specific state. I can inform you.

Feature H7. As the end condition, a first end condition in which the number of executed games (advantageous section game number AG) in the first game state reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) and a second end condition as the predetermined end condition A plurality of the above-mentioned termination conditions including the above are provided.
The termination means terminates the first gaming state when any of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied.
The specific effect executing means satisfies the first start condition (which is the start timing of the ending effect in a situation where the maximum number of games is expected to be reached) corresponding to the first end condition, or the predetermined start condition. When the second start condition is satisfied, the specific effect is started.
When the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect (first ending effect) based on the establishment of the first start condition, the third means (sixth and seventh means) for continuing the specific effect during the execution. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H6, characterized in that the display control device 81 according to the embodiment includes a function of executing an effect setting process at the time of full stop and an effect setting process during a bonus).

For example, when a transition to a specific state occurs during execution of a specific effect, if the configuration is such that the specific effect is always stopped or interrupted, the specific effect may be interrupted frequently. In this respect, in the above configuration, it is specified during the execution of the specific effect started based on the establishment of the first start condition corresponding to the first end condition (the number of executed games in the first game state reaches the upper limit number of games). When the transition to the state occurs, the specific effect is continued, so that it is possible to reduce the frequency of interruption of the specific effect while synchronizing the specific effect with the first game state.

Feature H8. When the specific effect is continued by the third means and the specific effect ends during the specific state, a means for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the specific state after the end of the specific effect. The gaming machine according to feature H7, which comprises (a function of executing the processes of step S4705, step S4604, and step S4605 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the specific state) is executed after the end of the specific effect. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the transition to a specific state is in progress.

Feature H9. As the end condition, a first end condition in which the number of executed games (advantageous section game number AG) in the first game state reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) and a second end condition as the predetermined end condition are set. Contains multiple of the above termination conditions, including
The termination means terminates the first gaming state when any of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied.
When the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, a determination means for determining whether to stop or interrupt the specific effect during the execution (7th implementation). A function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5104 by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment) is provided.
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific means is to be stopped or interrupted, the specific means is to stop or interrupt the executing specific effect.
Remaining game number grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games when the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition (corresponding to the seventh embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S5101 by the display control device 81) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the determination means makes the determination with reference to the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining game number grasping means.

Even if the second end condition is satisfied before the first end condition before the transition to the specific state, the second end condition is satisfied as a result of the delay in the establishment timing of the second end condition due to the transition to the specific state. The end condition and the first end condition may be reversed, and the state may change so that the first end condition is satisfied before the second end condition. In this configuration, when a transition to a specific state occurs during execution of a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the specific effect is canceled or canceled with reference to the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied. Since it is determined whether or not to interrupt, the specific effect can be continued when a reversal phenomenon occurs, and the frequency at which the specific effect is interrupted can be reduced.

Feature H10. When the number of remaining games grasped by the means for grasping the number of remaining games is less than a predetermined number (a number equal to or less than the number of executed games of the bonus game corresponding to the second BB state), the determination means is performing the specific effect. The gaming machine according to feature H9, wherein it is determined that the game is not stopped or interrupted (step S5102).

According to the above configuration, if the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games when a specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the second start condition is within a certain range, the specific effect being executed is performed. It can be continued without interruption or interruption. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Features H11. The predetermined number is the upper limit increase number due to the specific state with respect to the number of games remaining up to the upper limit increase number when the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition. The gaming machine according to feature H10, which is a number obtained by adding an increase in the number of remaining games up to.

In the above configuration, when the state in which the first end condition is satisfied is changed before the second end condition, the specific effect being executed can be continued without being stopped or interrupted. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H12. The gaming machine according to feature H10 or feature H11, wherein the predetermined number is equal to or less than an expected value of the number of executed games in the specific state or an estimated value based on actual results.

In the above configuration, when the reversal phenomenon occurs within the range of the specific state, that is, when the first game state ends by reaching the upper limit number of games during the specific state, the specific effect can be continued. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H13. When it is determined by the determination means that the specific effect being executed is not stopped or interrupted, a fourth means (a function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) to continue the specific effect being executed. When,
When the specific effect is continued by the fourth means, a function of executing the process of steps S5201 to S5206 by the display control device 81 to end the continued specific effect according to the first end condition. )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H9 to H12, characterized in that

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the end condition of the specific effect is changed to that corresponding to the first end condition. That is, since the continued specific effect is ended according to the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games, it is possible to end the continued specific effect in synchronization with the end of the first game state.

Feature H14. When it is determined by the determination means that the specific effect being executed is not stopped or interrupted, a fourth means (a function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) to continue the specific effect being executed. With
When the specific effect is continued by the fourth means, a predetermined notification (indicating the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games) that the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the first end condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H9 to H13, which comprises means for executing (or teaching, etc.).

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the first end condition, so that the player's confusion is suitably suppressed. Becomes possible.

When this feature is applied to the feature H13, it is possible to match the recognition of the player by the predetermined notification with the end timing of the continuous specific effect, and the confusion of the player can be suppressed more preferably. Is expected to be possible.

Feature H15. When the specific effect (second ending effect) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, the specific notification that the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition. Means for executing (notification that suggests or teaches the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number or the remaining game number converted from the remaining increase number)
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific effect being executed is not stopped or interrupted, a fourth means (a function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) to continue the specific effect being executed. When,
When the specific effect is continued by the fourth means, the means for disabling the specific notification and the means
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H9 to H14, characterized in that

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the specific notification that the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the continued specific effect corresponds to the second end condition, and it is possible to preferably suppress the confusion of the player.

When this feature is applied to the above feature H13, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from being confused even if the continuous specific effect is terminated according to the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games. The effect of becoming is expected. Further, the "means for non-execution of the specific notification" of the present feature can also be expressed as "means for non-execution of the specific notification during the continuous execution of the specific effect".

Feature H16. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H15, wherein the expected net increase per game in the specific state is less than 0.5 or a negative value.

In the above configuration, the mode of change of the game medium when the state shifts to a specific state is slightly increased, not increased, or decreased. In these cases, if the transition to the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect, it is assumed that the end timing of the first game state (the timing at which the predetermined end condition or the second end condition is satisfied) is delayed. By applying any of the above features H1 to H15 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience due to the delay in the end timing.

For each configuration of the above features H1 to H16, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. At least a first gaming state (advantageous section) and a second gaming state (normal section) different from the first gaming state are provided as the gaming state.
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, a transition means for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state (a function of executing the advantageous section transition lottery process by the main control device 101 and the section display first process) and
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the end means for ending the first game state (the function of executing the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
When the first game state ends, a specific effect (ending effect) corresponding to the end of the first game state is a predetermined effect means (ending effect) over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. With the specific effect execution means (function of executing the ending effect setting process and the ending effect execution process by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65). ,
When a predetermined condition (the second BB prize is established) is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the continuation determination means (sixth and seventh) for determining whether or not to continue the specific effect during the execution. The function of executing the bonus medium effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment of
When it is determined by the continuation determination means that the specific effect being executed is continued, and when it is determined by the continuation determination means that the specific effect is not continued, the specific effect during the execution is stopped or interrupted. (Functions for executing the effect setting process at the time of full stop and the effect setting process during bonus by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments)
With
As the end condition, the first end condition (the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games) and the second end condition different from the first end condition (the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY reaches the upper limit increase number). A plurality of the above-mentioned termination conditions including (to do) are provided.
The termination means terminates the first gaming state when any of the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied.
The continuation determination means continues the executing specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is executed in accordance with the first end condition. Then, when the specific effect is executed in accordance with the second end condition, it is determined that the specific effect being executed is not continued.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state shifts to the first gaming state, and the first gaming state ends when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Then, when the first game state ends, a specific effect corresponding to the end is executed over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. As a result, the player can recognize that the first gaming state ends.

Under such a configuration, the present feature is provided with a continuation determination means for determining whether to continue, stop, or interrupt the specific effect being executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. There is. In the continuation determination means, when the end condition of the first game state that triggered the specific effect is the first end condition, the specific effect being executed is continued, and the first game state that triggered the specific effect When the end condition is the second end condition, the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted. Here, since the specific effect is started on the premise of the situation before the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, the end of the first game state in relation to the end condition of the predetermined condition with the first game state. If it affects the timing, the synchronization between the specific effect and the end timing of the first game state may be disturbed. In such a case, in order to suppress the confusion of the player, it is preferable to cancel or interrupt the specific effect being executed. However, if the specific effect is frequently canceled or interrupted, the specific effect is often interrupted, and there is a concern that the effect of the effect may be reduced. In this regard, in this feature, whether or not to cancel or interrupt the specific effect being executed in relation to the predetermined condition established during the specific effect and the end condition of the first gaming state that triggered the specific effect. It is structured to judge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive interruption of the specific effect while suppressing the influence of the establishment of the predetermined condition.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied is increased.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied is increased, so that the end timing of the first game state is delayed. In such a case, since the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the end timing of the first game state due to the specific effect, and to minimize the influence of the establishment of the predetermined condition. Becomes possible.

In addition, this feature is "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied is not increased, and the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied is increased. It can also be expressed as "consisting of."

Feature I3. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific state transition means (function for executing the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to the specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over a plurality of games, and
The first means as the specific means and
When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the second means for executing the specific effect after the end of the specific state and the second means.
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, characterized in that

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is executed after the end of the specific state, the player is appropriately notified that the first game state ends even if the specific effect is stopped or interrupted in the middle. Will be possible.

Feature I4. The second means is characterized in that, as the specific effect to be executed after the end of the specific state, a means for executing an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect stopped or interrupted by the first means is provided. Features The gaming machine according to I3.

In the above configuration, as the specific effect after the specific state, the continuation of the canceled or interrupted specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect can be executed to the end. For example, when the part of the specific effect that the player wants to see is set at the end of the specific effect, the player takes care not to satisfy the predetermined condition in order to avoid the specific effect being canceled or interrupted. Need arises. This makes it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game in the first game state and the specific effect. In this respect, in this configuration, since the continuation of the canceled or interrupted specific effect is resumed after the end of the specific state, the specific effect can be executed to the end even if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the specific effect. Therefore, the player can play the game without being distracted by whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the configuration can be made easy to play.

In addition, for example, when designing a specific production in consideration of the end in the middle, the part that becomes a mountainous part in the production (the part that the game machine designer wants to show to the player or the part that is spectacular to the player) There is no choice but to set it in the early or middle stage of a specific production. In this case, it tends to be a specific production with a dented bottom impression, and it becomes difficult to design the production in order to obtain the support of the player. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the mountainous part is set at the final stage of the specific effect, the implementation of the part cannot be canceled due to cancellation or interruption, so that the effect design of the specific effect can be facilitated. That is, not only is it easy for the player to play, but it can also contribute to reducing the design burden.

Feature I5. When the specific effect is executed by the second means, a grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied is provided.
The game according to feature I3 or feature I4, wherein the second means includes means for executing a new specific effect with a number of games corresponding to the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means. Machine.

Depending on the length of the transition period to the specific state, if the specific effect is restarted from the middle after the end of the specific state, the player may not understand what has started, which may cause confusion for the player. In this respect, in this configuration, since a new specific effect is executed after the specific state, it is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to preferably suppress the confusion of the player. In addition, when executing a new specific effect after the specific state, the number of games remaining until the second end condition is satisfied is grasped, and the number of games is executed according to the grasped number of remaining games. The specific effect after the specific state can be ended according to the end timing of the first game state changed by the transition to the state, and the specific effect and the first game state can be suitably synchronized.

When this feature is applied to the feature I4, "the specific state has a first specific state and a second specific state having a longer transition period than the first specific state, and the second specific state. When the first specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the means follows the continuation of the specific effect stopped or interrupted by the first means. When the means for executing the corresponding effect after the end of the specific effect and the second specific state occur during the execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is stopped or interrupted by the first means, a new specific effect is specified. It is provided with means for executing the effect after the end of the specific state. " In this case, it is possible to switch whether to restart the subsequent specific effect or to execute a new specific effect according to the type of the specific state (the length of the transition period to the specific state).

Feature I6. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied is increased.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, the continuation determination means is executed in response to the second end condition, the specific effect being executed. A second determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5104 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment) for determining whether or not to suspend or interrupt the process is provided.
Remaining game number grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the process of step S5101 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment is executed. Function)
The second determination means is characterized in that it determines whether or not to cancel or interrupt the specific effect being executed with reference to the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining game number grasping means. The gaming machine described in any of I5.

Even if the second end condition is satisfied before the first end condition is satisfied before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second end condition is delayed as a result of the establishment of the predetermined condition delaying the establishment timing of the second end condition. The condition and the first end condition may be reversed, and the state may change so that the first end condition is satisfied before the second end condition. In this configuration, in order to determine whether or not to cancel or interrupt the specific effect by referring to the number of games remaining until the first end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specification corresponding to the second end condition is performed. Even if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect, the specific effect can be continued when a reversal phenomenon occurs, and the frequency of interruption of the specific effect can be reduced.

Feature I7. When the number of remaining games grasped by the means for grasping the number of remaining games is less than a predetermined number (the number equal to or less than the number of executed games of the bonus game corresponding to the second BB state), the second determination means is performing the execution. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein it is determined that the specific effect is not canceled or interrupted (step S5102).

According to the above configuration, if the number of games remaining until the first end condition is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect corresponding to the second end condition, the specific effect being executed is being executed. Can be continued without interruption or interruption. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature I8. The predetermined number is the number of games remaining until the second end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, until the second end condition according to the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature I7, which is a number obtained by adding an increase in the number of remaining games.

In the above configuration, when the state in which the first end condition is satisfied is changed before the second end condition, the specific effect being executed can be continued without being stopped or interrupted. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature I9. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is provided with a specific state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over a plurality of games. ,
The gaming machine according to feature I7 or feature I8, wherein the predetermined number is equal to or less than an expected value of the number of executed games in the specific state or an estimated value based on actual results.

In the above configuration, when the reversal phenomenon occurs within the range of the specific state, that is, when the first game state ends by reaching the upper limit number of games during the specific state, the specific effect can be continued. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature I10. When it is determined by the second determination means that the executing specific effect is not stopped or interrupted, the specific means continues the executing specific effect (step S5104 by the display control device 81). Function to execute the processing of),
When the specific effect is continued based on the determination by the second determination means that the executing specific effect is not stopped or interrupted, the continued specific effect is subjected to the first end condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, characterized in that the means for terminating (the function of executing the processing of steps S5201 to S5206 by the display control device 81) is provided.

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the end condition of the specific effect is changed to that corresponding to the first end condition. That is, since the continued specific effect is terminated according to the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games, it is possible to synchronize the specific effect with the first game state.

Feature I11. When it is determined by the second determination means that the executing specific effect is not stopped or interrupted, the specific means continues the executing specific effect (step S5104 by the display control device 81). Function to execute the processing of),
When the specific effect is continued based on the determination by the second determination means that the executing specific effect is not stopped or interrupted, the continued specific effect corresponds to the first end condition. Any of the features I6 to I10, which comprises means for executing a predetermined notification (a notification that suggests or teaches the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games) that the player can recognize that the game is to be played. The game machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the first end condition, so that the player's confusion is suitably suppressed. Becomes possible.

When this feature is applied to the feature I10, it is possible to match the recognition of the player by the predetermined notification with the end timing of the continuous specific effect, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the confusion of the player. Is expected to be possible.

Feature I12. When the specific effect is executed in response to the second end condition, the specific notification (remaining up to the upper limit increase number) that the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition. It is provided with a means for executing the increase number and the notification that suggests or teaches the remaining game number obtained by converting the remaining increase number into the number of games.
When it is determined by the second determination means that the executing specific effect is not stopped or interrupted, the specific means continues the executing specific effect (step S5104 by the display control device 81). Function to execute the processing of),
When the specific effect is continued based on the determination by the second determination means that the specific effect being executed is not stopped or interrupted, the means for disabling the specific notification is provided. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I11.

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the specific notification that the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the continued specific effect corresponds to the second end condition, and it is possible to preferably suppress the confusion of the player.

When this feature is applied to the above feature I10, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from being confused even if the continuous specific effect is terminated according to the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games. The effect of becoming is expected. Further, the "means for non-execution of the specific notification" of the present feature can also be expressed as "means for non-execution of the specific notification during the continuous execution of the specific effect".

Feature I13. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific state transition means (function for executing the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to the specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over a plurality of games, and
When the specific effect is continued by the specific means and the specific effect ends during the specific state, a means (bonus effect) for executing the predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the specific state after the end of the specific effect ( The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I12, characterized in that the display control device 81 includes a function of executing the processes of steps S4705, S4604, and S4605).

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the continuation of the specific effect is prioritized, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the specific state) is executed after the end of the specific effect. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the transition to a specific state is in progress.

For each configuration of the above features I1 to I13, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, and features. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature I group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature I group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component. When each of the above features is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, it can be understood that the game (1 game) related to each feature is a variation (1 variation).

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol sequence in the final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine, 32 ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop switch, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit, 81 ... Display control device, 101 ... Main control device.

Claims (6)

A plurality of variable display areas in which the pattern is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when the stop condition is satisfied.
A specific effect executing means for ensuring that the specific effect is executed by a predetermined effect means in each of the case where the first opportunity is established and the case where the second opportunity different from the first opportunity is established.
With
The specific effect is executed over a period in which the game in which the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas is performed a plurality of times. Is a thing
The specific effect executing means is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, a continuation determination means for determining whether or not to continue the specific effect during the execution, and a continuation determination means.
When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect, the first means for continuing the specific effect being executed and the first means for continuing the specific effect.
When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to the fact that the specific effect is not continued, the second means for stopping or interrupting the specific effect being executed and the second means.
With
When the specific effect being executed is executed based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the continuation determination means determines that the specific effect is to be continued, and the specific effect being executed is the first. (2) A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with means for determining that the specific effect is not continued when the game is executed based on the establishment of the opportunity. A special determination means for executing a special determination as to whether or not to cause a special state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity,
When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the determination result of the special determination becomes the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the special state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special state and the special state transition means.
With
The first opportunity is that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific result is not in the winning state.
The game according to claim 1, wherein the second opportunity is that the determination result of the special determination becomes the specific result or a predetermined execution condition based on the specific result is satisfied. Machine. When the determination result of the special determination is the specific result, at least one of the specific notifications corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result is waited for for a plurality of games. Waiting period setting means that can set the period and
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the updating means for updating the number of remaining games in the waiting period according to the execution of the game, and the updating means.
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the elapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the update result becomes the predetermined result, the gaming state is set to the special. Special game state transition means to shift to the state,
With
When a predetermined event occurs, a specific state transition means for shifting to a specific state in which the update of the remaining number of games by the update means is not executed over a plurality of games is provided.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined event occurs or the state shifts to the specific state. The claim is characterized in that when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means, a third means for executing the specific effect during the remaining waiting period after the end of the specific state is provided. The gaming machine according to 3. A special determination means for executing a special determination as to whether or not to cause a special state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity,
When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the determination result of the special determination becomes the specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, the special state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special state and the special state transition means.
With
The first opportunity is that the determination result of the special determination becomes the specific result or that a predetermined execution condition based on the specific result is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second opportunity is that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state. The predetermined condition is not satisfied when the game is started with the number of bets set to the first number, and the game is started with the number of bets set to a second number different from the first number. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the game machine is established by being played.

Images